[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2020187115A1 - Method and device for indicating resources - Google Patents

Method and device for indicating resources Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020187115A1
WO2020187115A1 PCT/CN2020/078898 CN2020078898W WO2020187115A1 WO 2020187115 A1 WO2020187115 A1 WO 2020187115A1 CN 2020078898 W CN2020078898 W CN 2020078898W WO 2020187115 A1 WO2020187115 A1 WO 2020187115A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
indication
resource
indication information
resources
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2020/078898
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘凤威
陈磊
邱晶
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2020187115A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020187115A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • This application relates to the technical field of access and backhaul integrated IAB, and in particular to a method and device for indicating resources in an IAB system.
  • the wireless relay node establishes a connection with the core network through a wireless backhaul link, which can save part of the fiber deployment cost.
  • the relay node establishes a wireless backhaul link with one or more upper-level nodes, and accesses the core network through the upper-level nodes.
  • the upper-level node establishes an access link between the relay node and the UE can control the relay node through a variety of signaling (for example, data scheduling, timing modulation, power control, etc.).
  • the relay node can provide services for one or more subordinate nodes.
  • the upper node of the relay node can be a base station or another relay node.
  • the subordinate node of the relay node can be the UE or another relay node.
  • the NR in-band relay solution is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node (IAB node).
  • the IAB node includes a terminal (mobile termination, MT) function and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) function. Among them, MT is used for the communication between the IAB node and the upper-level node, and DU is used for the communication between the IAB node and the lower-level node,
  • the two-level resource indication means that the upper-level node configures resources for the DU of the IAB node in an explicit or implicit manner
  • the resource type includes at least two types: soft and hard.
  • the hard resource represents the resource that is always available to the DU of the IAB node, and the availability of the soft resource depends on the instruction of the superior node.
  • the IAB node continues to give resource instructions to its lower-level nodes according to the resource instructions of the upper-level nodes.
  • the present application provides a method for indicating resources, which can avoid the problem of possible conflicts in resource indications of multi-level IAB nodes in the IAB system.
  • a method for indicating resources includes: a second node obtains resource configuration information, the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node; the second node receives the first node The sent first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node, the first node is the superior node of the second node; the second node The second indication information is determined according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information. The second indication information is used to indicate the available status of resources between the second node and the third node on the second indication area.
  • the second indication area includes At least one dynamic resource indicated by an indication information, the second indication information indicates that the status of at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is unavailable; the second node sends the second indication information to the third node, and the third node is The subordinate node of the second node.
  • the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, including: the second indication area includes fixed resources of Y second nodes, The second indication information indicates whether the availability status of Z of the Y fixed resources is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are integers greater than or equal to 0, and Z is less than or equal to Y.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node on the first indication area
  • the second node uses the first indication information
  • the method further includes: the second node determines the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the available status of some resources of the MT; or, the first indication information is used to indicate The available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node in the first indication area.
  • the method further includes: the second node according to the first indication information To determine the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node.
  • the configuration information of the first indication information includes one or more of the following information: the start time of the first indication area; the end time of the first indication area ; The duration of the first indication area; the interval between the time domain position where the first indication information is located and the start position of the first indication area; the resource identifier of the dynamic resource, the resource identifier includes symbol number, slot number, and subframe At least one of the number and the system frame number; the resource identifier of the MT resource to be indicated, and the resource identifier includes at least one of a symbol number, a time slot number, a subframe number, and a system frame number.
  • the first indication area includes the first dynamic resource, the one or more dynamic resources indicated by the first indication information includes the first dynamic resource, and the method further The method includes: the second node receives the third indication information from the first node, the third indication information indicates the available status of the first dynamic resource, the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information and the first indication indicated by the first indication information.
  • the available status of the dynamic resource is different, the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; the second node determines the available status of the first dynamic resource according to the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information.
  • the first indication area includes a second dynamic resource
  • the second node receives the second dynamic resource from the first node on the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource.
  • the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is configured to be always available through the protocol, or the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is passed by the first node through a different value from the fourth indication information
  • the instructions are indicated as always available.
  • a method for indicating resources includes: a second node obtains resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node; the second node Receive first indication information sent by a first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node, and the first node is an upper node of the second node ; The second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, the second indication information is used to indicate the second indication area of the third node, the second indication area includes the first area, and the first area includes K A dynamic resource, the first area is located after the end of the first indication area, and K is a non-negative integer; the second node sends second indication information to the third node, and the third node is a subordinate node of the second node.
  • the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, including: the second node determines that the first area contains The available status of the K dynamic resources of the K dynamic resources, the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the K dynamic resources in the time domain belong to the fixed resources indicated in the resource configuration information of the second node; the second node according to the K dynamic resources The available state of the resource determines the second indication information.
  • the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, including: the second node includes the first area according to the resource configuration information N of the K dynamic resources in, are determined to be unavailable, and the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the N dynamic resources in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources indicated in the resource configuration information of the second node, N ⁇ K and N are non-negative integers; the second node determines the second indication information according to the available status of the K dynamic resources.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node on the first indication area
  • the second node uses the first indication information
  • the method further includes: the second node determines the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the available status of some resources of the MT; or, the first indication information is used to indicate The available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node in the first indication area.
  • the method further includes: the second node according to the first indication information To determine the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node.
  • the configuration information of the first indication information includes one or more of the following information: the start time of the first indication area; the end time of the first indication area ; The duration of the first indication area; the interval between the time domain position where the first indication information is located and the start position of the first indication area; the resource identifier of the dynamic resource, the resource identifier includes symbol number, slot number, and subframe At least one of number and system frame number.
  • the first indication area includes the first dynamic resource
  • the one or more dynamic resources indicated by the first indication information includes the first dynamic resource
  • the method further The method includes: the second node receives third indication information from the first node, the third indication information indicates the available status of the first dynamic resource, the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information, and the first indication information indicated by the first indication information.
  • the available status of the dynamic resource is different, the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; the second node determines the available status of the first dynamic resource according to the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information.
  • the first indication area includes a second dynamic resource
  • the second node receives the first node from the first node on the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource.
  • the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is configured to be always available through the protocol, or the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is passed by the first node through a different value from the fourth indication information
  • the instructions are indicated as always available.
  • a device for indicating resources has the function of implementing the methods in the first aspect or the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, or any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the network device further includes a communication interface.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored.
  • the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect, the second aspect, or the first aspect, The method in any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • this application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is configured to read and execute a computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or wire, and the memory is used to store a computer program.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the first and second aspects, as well as the first and second aspects. Any one of the possible implementation methods.
  • the present application also provides a communication system.
  • the system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node.
  • the second node executes the foregoing first aspect or any one of the first possible methods, or executes the foregoing The first aspect or any one of the first possible methods.
  • the IAB node obtains resource configuration information of itself and its subordinate node (ie, the third node), and receives an indication from the superior node (ie, the first node) that the IAB node is The first indication information of the available state of the dynamic resource on the first indication area.
  • the IAB node determines that the resource that needs to be instructed by the subordinate node exceeds the instruction of its superior node, the IAB node determines how to instruct the subordinate node for the resource that exceeds the instruction of the superior node according to its own resource configuration information.
  • the IAB node Since the resource configuration of the IAB node is fixed, even if the resource that the IAB node needs to indicate to its lower-level node exceeds the instruction of the upper-level node, the IAB node can avoid the follow-up instruction of its upper-level node according to the resource configuration information Resources, so that even if instructions are given to subordinate nodes in advance, subsequent instructions will not conflict with previous instructions.
  • Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an IAB system suitable for the technical solution of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the IAB system.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an IAB node.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the allocation of downlink backhaul resources in the LTE relay system.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of resource configuration of an IAB node.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of an example of an indication area indicating DCI.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of multiple indication DCI indicating the same indication area.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of an IAB node.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of another example of an indication area indicating DCI.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of still another example of the indication area indicating the DCI.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of an example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic diagram of another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of an example of resource configuration of the X area.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for indicating resources.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of the X area.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for indicating resources.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of the X area.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of the X area.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus for indicating resources provided by this application.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by the present application.
  • the communication systems mentioned in the embodiments of this application include but are not limited to: narrowband-internet of things (NB-IoT) systems, wireless local access network (WLAN) systems, and long-term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) systems, fifth generation mobile networks (5th generation wireless systems, 5G) or post 5G communication systems, such as new radio (NR) systems, device to device (device to device, D2D) Communication system, etc.
  • NB-IoT narrowband-internet of things
  • WLAN wireless local access network
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • 5G fifth generation mobile networks
  • 5G fifth generation wireless systems
  • post 5G communication systems such as new radio (NR) systems
  • NR new radio
  • an IAB system includes at least one base station 100, and one or more terminal devices (terminal) 101 served by the base station 100, one or more relay nodes (that is, IAB nodes) 110, and IAB One or more terminal devices 111 served by the node 110.
  • the base station 100 is called a donor next generation node B (DgNB), and the IAB node 110 is connected to the base station 100 through a wireless backhaul link 113.
  • the donor base station is also referred to as a donor node in this application, that is, a donor node.
  • the base station 100 includes, but is not limited to: evolved node B (evolved node base, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC) , Base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband Unit, BBU), evolved (evolved LTE, eLTE) base station, NR base station (next generation node B, gNB) etc.
  • evolved node B evolved node base, eNB
  • RNC radio network controller
  • node B node B
  • base station controller base station controller
  • BSC base station controller
  • Terminal equipment includes but is not limited to: user equipment (UE), mobile station, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent, Station (ST), cell phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station in wireless local area network (wireless local access network, WLAN) Personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices, other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, mobile stations in the future 5G network, and public Any of the terminal devices in the public land mobile network (PLMN) network.
  • the IAB node is a specific name of a relay node, which does not limit the solution of the present application.
  • the IAB node of the present application may also be called a relay node (RN), a transmission and reception point (transmission and reception point), a relay transmission and reception point (relaying TRP), etc.
  • RN relay node
  • transmission and reception point transmission and reception point
  • TRP relay transmission and reception point
  • the IAB system may also include multiple other IAB nodes, for example, the IAB node 120 and the IAB node 130.
  • the IAB node 120 is connected to the IAB node 110 through a wireless backhaul link 123 to access the network.
  • the IAB node 130 is connected to the IAB node 110 through a wireless backhaul link 133 to access the network.
  • the IAB node 120 serves one or more terminal devices 121, and the IAB node 130 serves one or more terminal devices 131.
  • both the IAB node 110 and the IAB node 120 are connected to the network through a wireless backhaul link.
  • the wireless backhaul links are all viewed from the perspective of the relay node.
  • the wireless backhaul link 113 is the backhaul link of the IAB node 110
  • the wireless backhaul link 123 is the IAB node 120.
  • Backhaul link As shown in Figure 1, an IAB node, such as 120, can be connected to another IAB node 110 through a wireless backhaul link, such as 123, to connect to the network.
  • the relay node can be connected to the network via a multi-level wireless relay node. It should be understood that the use of IAB nodes in this application is only for the purpose of description, and does not mean that the solution of this application is only used in NR scenarios. In this application, IAB nodes can generally refer to any node or device with a relay function. The use of IAB node and relay node in this application should be understood to have the same meaning.
  • Access link The link between the UE and the IAB node or IAB donor node (IAB donor).
  • the access link includes a wireless link used when a node communicates with its subordinate nodes.
  • the access link includes an uplink access link and a downlink access link.
  • the uplink access link is also referred to as the uplink transmission of the access link, and the downlink access link is also referred to as the downlink transmission of the access link.
  • Backhaul link the link between the IAB node and the IAB child node (IAB child node) or the IAB parent node (IAB parent node).
  • the backhaul link includes the downlink transmission link with the IAB child node or the IAB parent node, and the uplink transmission link with the IAB child node or the IAB parent node.
  • the data transmission of the IAB node to the parent node of the IAB or the uplink transmission of the child node of the IAB is called the uplink transmission of the backhaul link.
  • the IAB node receives the data transmission of the IAB parent node, or the data transmission to the IAB child node is called the downlink transmission of the backhaul link.
  • the backhaul link between the IAB node and the IAB parent node is also called the parent BH, and the backhaul link between the IAB node and the IAB child node It is called the lower-level backhaul link (child BH).
  • the lower-level backhaul link and access link of the IAB node are collectively referred to as the access link, that is, the lower-level node is regarded as a terminal device of the upper-level node.
  • the access link that is, the lower-level node is regarded as a terminal device of the upper-level node.
  • an IAB node is connected to an upper-level node.
  • an IAB node such as 120, can have multiple upper-level nodes simultaneously providing services for an IAB node.
  • the IAB node 130 in Figure 1 also It may be connected to the IAB node 120 through the backhaul link 134, that is, both the IAB node 110 and the IAB node 120 are regarded as the upper node of the IAB node 130.
  • the names of the IAB nodes 110, 120, and 130 do not limit the scenarios or networks where they are deployed, and may be any other names such as relay, RN, and so on. The use of the IAB node in this application is only for the convenience of description.
  • the wireless links 102, 112, 122, 132, 113, 123, 133, 134 can be bidirectional links, including uplink and downlink transmission links.
  • the wireless backhaul links 113, 123, 133, 134 can be used by the upper node to provide services for the lower node, such as the upper node 100 is the lower node 110 provides wireless backhaul services.
  • the uplink and downlink of the backhaul link may be separated, that is, the uplink and the downlink are not transmitted through the same node.
  • the downlink transmission refers to an upper node, such as node 100, and a lower node, such as node 110, transmitting information or data
  • the uplink transmission refers to a lower node, such as node 110, and an upper node, such as node 100, transmitting information or data.
  • the node is not limited to whether it is a network node or a terminal device.
  • the terminal device can act as a relay node to serve other terminal devices.
  • the wireless backhaul link can be an access link in some scenarios.
  • the backhaul link 123 can also be regarded as an access link for the node 110, and the backhaul link 113 is also the access link of the node 100. link.
  • the above-mentioned upper node may be a base station or a relay node
  • the lower node may be a relay node or a terminal device with a relay function.
  • the lower node may also be a terminal device.
  • Figure 2 is a specific example of the IAB system.
  • the IAB system shown in FIG. 2 it includes a donor base station, IAB node 1, IAB node 2, UE1 and UE2.
  • the link between the donor base station and the IAB node 1 and the link between the IAB node 1 and the IAB node 2 are backhaul links.
  • the link between UE1 and the donor base station and the link between UE2 and IAB node 1 are access links.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an IAB node.
  • the mobile-termination (MT) function is defined as a component similar to the UE.
  • MT is called a function (or module) that resides on the IAB node. Since the MT is similar to the function of an ordinary UE, it can be considered that the IAB node accesses the upper node or network through the MT.
  • a distributed unit (DU) function is defined as a component similar to a base station.
  • DU is called a function (or module) that resides on the IAB node. Since the DU is similar to the function or part of the function of an ordinary base station, it can be considered that the IAB node can allow the access of lower-level nodes and terminal equipment through the DU.
  • In-band relay generally has the limitation of half-duplex. Specifically, an IAB node cannot send a downlink signal to its child node when receiving a downlink signal sent by its parent node, while an IAB node is receiving an uplink signal sent by its child node. It cannot send an uplink signal to its parent node.
  • the donor node semi-statically configures the backhaul resources for the relay node.
  • Figure 4 shows a specific example of the allocation of downlink backhaul resources in the LTE relay system.
  • the donor node allocates backhaul link resources to the relay node in units of subframes (1ms), and the allocation period is one radio frame (10ms).
  • the donor node designates part of the subframes as the backhaul link subframes through radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the number and positions of the backhaul link subframes can be reconfigured, but the reconfiguration through RRC signaling requires a longer time.
  • the relay node For a relay node in LTE, when a subframe is configured as a backhaul subframe, the relay node needs to monitor the relay physical downlink control channel (R-PDCCH) and/or It receives the physical downlink share channel (PDSCH), so it cannot be sent on the access link. As shown in FIG. 4, subframes 2, 4, and 6 are configured as backhaul links, and subframes 2, 4, and 6 on the access link at the corresponding positions are unavailable. Therefore, the LTE relay uses semi-static time division multiplexing (TDM) resource allocation.
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • the following describes the resource allocation method of the IAB system in NR.
  • the MT resource of the IAB node can be configured into three types: downlink (downlink, D), uplink (uplink, U), and flexible (Flexible, F). These three types are also supported by existing terminal equipment, so they can be indicated by existing signaling.
  • the DU resource of the IAB node can be configured as downlink, uplink, flexible and unavailable (Null, N) four types. Further, the DU's downlink, uplink, and flexible resources can also be divided into hard (hard, H) resources and soft (soft, S) resources. Among them, the hard resource of the DU indicates the resource that is always available to the DU.
  • the soft resource of the DU indicates that whether the DU is available depends on the indication of the upper-level node (for example, the donor node).
  • the resource allocation on the IAB node DU in the NR depends on the instruction of the superior node, and the instruction of the DU resource is performed through the semi-static allocation and the dynamic instruction.
  • This resource allocation method is very different from the resource allocation method in the LTE system.
  • the MT of the IAB node is connected to the DU of the upper node, and the DU of the IAB node is connected to the MT of the lower node.
  • the IAB The node can obtain the resource configuration of its MT resource and DU resource respectively.
  • it may include the transmission direction (D/U/F) of the MT resource and the DU resource, the type of the DU resource (soft/hard), and the location of the NULL resource of the DU.
  • D/U/F transmission direction
  • the type of the DU resource soft/hard
  • the location of the NULL resource of the DU the above-mentioned related configuration can be obtained through explicit signaling or implicitly.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of resource configuration of MT and DU in the case of time division multiplexing.
  • the MT resource e.g., the 1st, 1st, The MT resources corresponding to time slots 6, 7, and 8 are unavailable.
  • the MT of the IAB node has three types of resources, and the DU of the IAB node has a total of 7 types of resources.
  • the possible behaviors of the MT of the IAB node and its corresponding DU are as follows As shown in the two tables, Table 1 is the resource configuration under various possible resource type combinations of MT and DU in the time division multiplexing scenario.
  • Table 2 shows the resource configuration under various possible resource type combinations of MT and DU in a spatial division multiplexing (SDM) scenario.
  • SDM spatial division multiplexing
  • MT:Tx means that the MT should transmit after being scheduled
  • DU:Tx means DU can be transmitted
  • MT:Rx means that the MT is capable of receiving (if there is a signal that needs to be received);
  • DU:Rx means that the DU can schedule the uplink transmission of the lower node
  • MT:Tx/Rx means that MT should transmit or receive after being scheduled, but transmission and reception do not occur at the same time
  • DU:Tx/Rx means that DU can transmit or receive transmission from lower-level nodes, but transmission and reception do not occur at the same time;
  • IA means that the DU resource is explicitly or implicitly indicated as available
  • INA means that the DU resource is explicitly or implicitly indicated as unavailable
  • MT:NULL means that the MT does not send and does not have to have receiving capabilities
  • DU:NULL means that the DU does not send and does not receive transmissions from lower-level nodes.
  • the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU is unavailable.
  • the unavailable resource of the MT for example, the MT resource corresponding to time slots 1, 6, 7, and 8 in Figure 5:
  • the MT does not perform physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) monitoring on these resources, that is, if the search space overlaps these resources, the MT of the IAB node abandons the overlapped search space monitoring.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the MT may also have other unavailable resources.
  • the upper-level node will continue to use dynamic signaling (for example, downlink control information (DCI)) to dynamically indicate to the IAB node the availability of soft-type resources of its DU resources, for example, the upper-level node uses
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the dedicated DCI or dedicated DCI field indicates the availability of the soft resources of the IAB node.
  • the information contained in the dynamic signaling is called indication information, and the above dedicated DCI or dedicated DCI field can be collectively referred to as indicating DCI .
  • the above dynamic indication can be achieved in a variety of ways.
  • this can be done through explicit instructions.
  • the superior node directly indicates the availability of the soft resource of the DU resource of the IAB node.
  • it can also indicate the transmission of some (for example, F type) soft resources (for example, the DU resources corresponding to the 4th and 5th time slots in Fig. 5).
  • some (for example, F type) soft resources for example, the DU resources corresponding to the 4th and 5th time slots in Fig. 5).
  • the upper-level node indicates whether the MT resource of the IAB node (for example, the available resource of the MT) is released (or whether it is available), and the IAB node determines the soft type resource of its DU resource according to the indication of the upper-level node for the above-mentioned MT resource. Availability.
  • the MT resource of the IAB node can be released or not released (in other words, the MT resource is available or unavailable), and the IAB node determines the soft type of the corresponding DU resource according to the result of the upper-level node's indication of the MT resource Availability of resources.
  • the MT resource of the IAB node can be configured into three types: uplink, downlink and flexible.
  • the release of an MT resource of the IAB node by the superior node indicates that the superior node does not communicate with the IAB node on this resource, and the failure of the superior node to release an MT resource of the IAB node indicates that the superior node may communicate with the IAB node on this resource.
  • the IAB node regards the released MT resources as unavailable MT resources.
  • dynamic indication signaling can achieve the following two purposes: (1) the IAB node can determine the availability of its DU soft resources; (2) the IAB node can determine whether its MT resources are released, or determine Availability of MT resources.
  • this application may describe the behavior of indicating information (for example, indicating DCI) by describing the release or non-release of MT resources. It should be noted, however, that the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to explicit indications, that is, in a TDM scenario, releasing MT resources can be equivalent to indicating that the soft type resources of the corresponding DU resources are available, and the MT may not be released. The resource is equivalent to indicating that the soft resource of the corresponding DU resource is unavailable.
  • implicit indications can be applied to both TDM scenarios and SDM (or FDM) scenarios, that is, for SDM (or FDM) scenarios, the IAB node can still indicate its MT resource according to the superior node to determine its DU soft resource Availability.
  • the correspondence between the explicit resource indication (indicating DU resources) and the implicit resource indication (indicating MT resources) may be different in different multiplexing scenarios.
  • the DU resource corresponding to the available resource of the MT must be unavailable, and vice versa;
  • MT and DU can be received or sent at the same time, so MT
  • the DU resource corresponding to the available resource of may be unavailable (when the transmission directions of the MT and DU resources are both downlink or uplink), or may be available (when the transmission directions of the MT and DU resources are opposite).
  • FIG. 5 also shows a method of implicitly indicating the availability of soft resources of the DU by indicating DCI.
  • the IAB node receives the instruction DCI from the upper-level node, and more specifically, the MT of the IAB node receives the instruction DCI sent by the upper-level node.
  • the MT of the IAB node since the DU resource type of the 0th time slot is NULL, the corresponding MT resource of the 0th time slot is an available resource, and the MT of the IAB node can receive the indication DCI sent by the upper node through this time slot.
  • the indication DCI can indicate whether to release one or more MT resources. After receiving the indication DCI, the IAB node can determine whether the soft resources of the corresponding DU are available through whether the one or more MT resources are released.
  • the indication DCI can indicate whether the MT resources of the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots are released (corresponding to the arrow between the upper node DU and the IAB node MT in Figure 5, where the solid line indicates not to release Corresponding MT resources, the dotted line indicates the release of the corresponding MT resources), to indirectly indicate whether the soft resources of the DUs in the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots are available (corresponding between the IAB node DU and the subordinate node MT in Figure 5 Arrow, where the dashed line means unavailable and the solid line means usable).
  • the indication DCI may indicate not to release the MT resources of time slots 2, 4, and 9 (corresponding to the dashed arrow in Figure 5), then the soft resources of the corresponding DU are unavailable, that is, the DU cannot be Transmission is performed on the time slot.
  • the indication DCI can indicate the release of the MT resources of the 3rd and 5th time slots, and the soft resources of the corresponding DU are available, that is, the DU can be transmitted on the aforementioned time slots.
  • the signal transmission behavior of the IAB node MT is given:
  • the MT of the IAB node thinks that the upper-level node will not schedule the PDSCH on this resource, and the physical uplink share channel (PUSCH). In other words, when the IAB node is scheduled for PUSCH transmission or PDSCH transmission, the transmission will not be located in the released MT resource;
  • the MT of the IAB node will not perform PDCCH monitoring, signal state information reference signal (channel state information-reference signal, CSI-RS) on this resource Reception, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission, etc., that is, the IAB node does not perform high-level configuration transmission on the released MT resources;
  • signal state information reference signal channel state information-reference signal, CSI-RS
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the MT of the IAB node can perform PDCCH monitoring, CSI reception, SRS transmission, PUCCH transmission, etc. on this resource, In other words, the IAB node can perform high-level configuration transmissions on MT resources that have not been released or scheduled;
  • the MT of the IAB node thinks that the superior node may perform PDSCH scheduling or PUSCH scheduling on this resource. It can be understood that in practical applications, the upper-level node may not schedule the IAB node MT on this resource;
  • the IAB node When the MT's PUCCH or PUSCH used for hybrid automatic repeat request-ack (HARQ-ACK) feedback is configured or dynamically indicated in an MT resource, the IAB node does not expect this resource to be indicated DCI released.
  • HARQ-ACK hybrid automatic repeat request-ack
  • the signal transmission behavior of the IAB node DU includes:
  • the IAB node can perform dynamic scheduling such as PDSCH and PUSCH on this resource;
  • the IAB node For TDM, when the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is indicated as not being released or unscheduled, the IAB node does not perform dynamic scheduling such as PDSCH and PUSCH on this resource; for SDM, when the MT corresponding to a DU resource After the resource is instructed not to be released or scheduled, the IAB node will not perform dynamic scheduling such as PDSCH and PUSCH that violates the half-duplex constraint on this resource;
  • the IAB node can send and receive semi-static configuration signals such as reference signals on this resource;
  • the IAB node when the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is indicated as not being released or unscheduled, the IAB node does not send and receive semi-static configuration signals such as reference signals on this resource.
  • the IAB node when the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is instructed not to be released or scheduled, the IAB node does not transmit and receive semi-static configuration signals such as reference signals that violate the half-duplex constraint on this resource.
  • the half-duplex constraint means that when the MT of the IAB node is in the transmitting state, the DU cannot be in the receiving state; and when the MT is in the receiving state, the DU cannot be in the transmitting state.
  • the IAB node may also need other configuration information to determine the availability of its DU resources. For example, when a DU resource is semi-statically configured as unavailable, even if the dynamic signaling changes its corresponding The MT resource is released, and the IAB node cannot use this resource to communicate with subordinate nodes.
  • the corresponding IAB node DU resource can be a soft resource; if the UE is configured with SFI to indicate the reception of DCI (that is, DCI format 2-0), but the signal is not configured in The flexible (F) resource of the UE, the corresponding IAB node DU resource can only be a hard resource; if the UE is not configured with SFI to indicate the reception of DCI (that is, DCI format 2-0), then the resource configured for the signal The corresponding IAB node DU resource can only be a hard resource. Under the above constraints, the IAB node can always receive or send the signal, or even if the IAB node cannot receive or send the signal, the IAB node DU can instruct the DCI to turn off the signal for the UE
  • the donor node or the superior node configures the DCI, it should ensure that the IAB node can use the DU resource corresponding to the released MT resource.
  • the IAB node DU For downlink transmission, the IAB node DU should have sufficient time to prepare and send PDCCH and PDSCH, and for uplink transmission, the IAB node DU should have sufficient time to prepare and send PDCCH, and the subordinate node or UE of the IAB node should have sufficient time Prepare and send PUSCH.
  • the MT of the IAB node Before the MT of the IAB node receives the indicating DCI, it needs to first receive the configuration information indicating the DCI.
  • the upper-level node can configure the MT through RRC signaling.
  • the RRC configuration indicating DCI provided in this application may include one or more of the following:
  • control channel resource set information control resource set, CORESET
  • search space set information search space set
  • the TCI status of some MT resources that is, the MT receives PDCCH and/or PDSCH beam information, or spatial quasi co-located (QCL) information.
  • the indication DCI may indicate the availability of one or more resources within a certain time domain range (or time domain area, time domain resource), and the time domain range indicated by the indication DCI is referred to as an indication area in this application.
  • the duration of the indication area can be defined by the protocol or configured by the network.
  • the duration of the indication area can be directly configured by the upper-level node or the donor node.
  • the upper-level node or the donor node may configure the duration of the indication area as n times the time division duplex (TDD) configuration period P, where n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • TDD time division duplex
  • the length of the indication area may be equal to the period of the indication DCI transmission.
  • the length of the indication area may be equal to the period of the search space corresponding to the indication DCI.
  • the TDD configuration period may be composed of two spliced periods (denoted as P1 and P2), and the length of the indication area may be n times the sum of the two periods, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • FIG. 6 shows an example of an indication area indicating DCI.
  • the indication area may include a start time (or start time domain position) and an end time (or end time domain position).
  • start time and end time of the indication area may be directly identified by the resource.
  • resource identifier or resource number
  • the indicator area usually contains its own start time and end time.
  • the start time of the indication area may also be determined indirectly by the interval between the time domain resource location where the DCI is indicated and the start time of the indication area, and this interval may be referred to as an indication delay.
  • the indication delay may also be described in other ways.
  • the indication delay may also be indirectly determined by the interval between the time domain resource location where the indication DCI is located and the start time of the indication area.
  • the indication delay may be configured by an upper-level node (for example, a donor node) through semi-static signaling, or may be dynamically indicated by an upper-level node through dynamic signaling, or may be defined by a protocol.
  • the semi-static signaling may be RRC signaling, for example.
  • the dynamic signaling may be, for example, a MAC control element (MAC CE) or DCI.
  • MAC CE MAC control element
  • the start time of the indication area is optional, and the start time of the indication area can be inferred by indicating the time domain resource where the DCI is located and the size of the indication delay.
  • the indication delay can be 0, that is, the interval between the time domain resource location where the DCI is located and the start time of the indication area is 0, or in other words, the time domain resource location and the indication area where the DCI is located The start time coincides.
  • the end time of the indicated area can be determined by the start time of the indicated area and the duration of the indicated area.
  • the time domain resource indicating the DCI is one or more (for example, three) symbols
  • the time domain resource position indicating the DCI can be indicated by the time domain position of the symbol occupied by the DCI or the symbol among the symbols occupied by the DCI.
  • the time domain position of a part of symbols (for example, the first symbol or the last symbol) is expressed.
  • the indication area can also be determined by the start time and end time of the indication area.
  • the IAB node receives the indication DCI on the available resources of the MT, and determines the availability of one or more resources in the indication area, which is a continuous time domain resource.
  • the indication area indicating the DCI may also be discrete.
  • the indication area may be composed of multiple disconnected time domain resources, which is not limited in this application.
  • the same indication area may be indicated by multiple indication DCIs.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of multiple indication DCIs indicating the same indication area.
  • the network side uses two or more identical indication DCIs (for example, indication DCI#1 and indication DCI#2 in Fig. 7) to indicate the same indication area at the same time, and the above two indication DCIs can pass different Time domain resources are received.
  • multiple indication DCIs refer to at least two indication DCIs, or greater than or equal to two indication DCIs.
  • multiple DCI indications can be transmitted using different beams, that is, multiple PDCCH indications that indicate DCI are located at different CORESETs, or multiple PDCCH indications that indicate DCI are transmitted with demodulation reference signals (DMRS).
  • DMRS demodulation reference signals
  • each indication DCI has its corresponding indication delay.
  • Two indication DCIs received through different time domain resources indicate the same indication area, and the indication delay of each indication DCI may be different.
  • the indication time delays indicating DCI#1 and indicating DCI#2 in FIG. 7 are different.
  • the indication DCI may not indicate all resources in the indication area.
  • the indication DCI may not indicate the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU.
  • the indicating DCI may not indicate the corresponding MT resources.
  • the indication DCI may indicate the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU, but it always indicates the release of the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU.
  • the upper-level node when the upper-level node configures the indicated DCI, it may configure the indicated resource identifier of the indicated DCI.
  • the indicator resource identifier indicating the DCI may be any one or more of symbol numbers, slot numbers, subframe numbers, system frame numbers, and so on.
  • the indicated resource indicates the MT or DU resource indicated by the indicated DCI.
  • the IAB node determines the hard/soft type of its DU resource according to the configuration of the indicated resource, and the determination rules are shown in Table 1 and Table 2 above. Specifically, the IAB node regards the MT resources other than the indicated resources configured for the DCI as "Null" resources, and infers the type (hard or soft) of the DU resource according to the multiplexing type (TDM, SDM or FDM).
  • TDM multiplexing type
  • the indication resource identifier indicating the DCI does not include the DU resource or the number of the MT resource corresponding to the DU resource.
  • the indication resource identifier indicating the DCI does not include the number of the MT resource (for example, the number of the time slot is not included) .
  • the MT resources corresponding to the soft resources of some DUs in the indication area may not be indicated by the indication DCI.
  • the indicator resource identifier indicating the DCI may not include the number of the MT resource corresponding to the soft resource of this part of the DU.
  • the DU of the IAB node can use the soft resources of this part of the DU.
  • the DU of the IAB node can only use this part of the resources for dynamic transmission, and cannot configure the transmission of periodic or semi-persistent signals.
  • the DU resources of the IAB node include hard resources and soft resources.
  • the upper-level node may indicate the available status of some or all of the soft resources to the IAB node.
  • the set of soft resources that are indicated (for example, through explicit indication or implicit indication) in this part of the indication area (the available state of the resource may change) can be called a dynamic resource.
  • the collection of hard resources in the indicated area and soft resources that are not indicated (the available state of the resources will not change) can be called fixed resources.
  • the fixed resources of the IAB node only include hard resources. If the upper-level node only indicates the available status of a part of the soft resources of the IAB node, the fixed resources of the IAB node include all hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated by the upper-level node. It should be understood that the indication of all soft resources of the IAB node by the upper-level node may be an explicit indication or an implicit indication. The specific indication method is not restricted in this application, and the implicit indication is as described above and will not be repeated.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of an IAB node.
  • the MT of the IAB node receives the indication DCI in the 0th time slot.
  • the start position of the indication area indicating the DCI is the first time slot and the end position is the 9th time slot. Therefore, the duration of the indication area is 9 time slots.
  • the indicating delay is also 0 time slots.
  • the time slot number in the figure may also be a symbol number, a subframe number, a system frame number, and other indicator resource identifiers, which are not limited in this application.
  • the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots are the soft resources of the DU
  • the first, sixth, seventh, and eighth time slots are the hard resources of the DU, that is, there are a total of Contains 5 soft resources and 4 hard resources.
  • the DCI indicated by the superior node can indicate the availability of all soft resources (that is, indicate the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots), and the dynamic resources of the IAB node include the second, third, and fourth time slots. , 5, and 9 time slots, the fixed resources of the IAB node include the 1, 6, 7, and 8 time slots.
  • the instruction DCI of the superior node may only indicate the availability of part of the soft resources (for example, the second, fourth, and fifth time slots in Figure 8), and the dynamic resources of the IAB node include the second, fourth, and fifth time slots ,
  • the fixed resources of the IAB node include 1, 6, 7, and 8 time slots and the 3rd and 9th time slots that will not be indicated by the superior node.
  • FIG. 9 shows another example of an indication area indicating DCI.
  • Indication area #0 is an indication of DCI that is not shown in Figure 9 before indication area #0. area.
  • Indication area #1 and indication area #2 are indication areas indicating DCI#1 and DCI#2, respectively. There is an overlapping area between the indication area #1 and the indication area #2.
  • the communication protocol can be subject to additional restrictions.
  • the communication protocol can be in accordance with any of the following Way to stipulate:
  • the protocol may stipulate that the results of multiple indication DCI indications should be the same.
  • multiple indication DCIs may indicate that the dynamic resource is available at the same time or indicate that the dynamic resource is not available at the same time.
  • the indication DCI#1 and the indication DCI#2 may simultaneously indicate that the first dynamic resource in the overlapping area is available or that the first dynamic resource is unavailable at the same time in an implicit manner.
  • the protocol may specify that subsequent (or later in the time domain) indication can override the result of the previous indication.
  • the protocol may specify that the indicating result of the DCI that is located later in the time domain covers the indicating result of the DCI that is the first in the time domain.
  • the indication DCI#1 and the indication DCI#2 can indicate the first dynamic resource in the overlapping area at the same time, and the indication DCI#1 and the indication DCI#2 have different results for indicating the first dynamic resource.
  • the IAB node may use the indication result indicating DCI#2 that is later in the time domain as a basis for determining the available status of the first dynamic resource.
  • the protocol may also make additional restrictions.
  • the subsequent indication DCI can only indicate that the resource previously indicated by the DCI indicated as DU unavailable is indicated as DU available, but cannot indicate the resource previously indicated as DU available. Indicates that DU is not available.
  • the subsequent indication DCI#2 may indicate that the first dynamic resource is available.
  • the subsequent indication DCI#2 should not indicate that the first dynamic resource is unavailable.
  • subsequent DCI indications can only release resources that were not released by DCI previously indicated (this resource is actually the MT resource corresponding to the dynamic resource in the time domain), but cannot release the MT resources previously indicated DCI. Instructed again not to release.
  • the MT available resource set of the IAB node is the union of the MT available resource sets indicated by the multiple indicator DCI. For example, within an indication range, DCI#1 indicates that the MT resource of the first time slot is not released (available), and DCI#2 indicates that the MT resource of the second time slot is not released (available). Then the final set of available MT resources is the first and second time slots.
  • the IAB node should infer the availability of its DU soft resources based on this union.
  • FIG. 10 shows another example of an indication area indicating DCI.
  • the indication area indicating DCI#1 contains the second dynamic resource
  • the IAB node receives the indication DCI#2 from the upper node through the MT resource corresponding to the second dynamic resource (that is, the indication area contains another indication DCI resources)
  • the communication protocol can stipulate that the MT resource corresponding to the second dynamic resource is always available.
  • the second dynamic resource can be configured as the DU's Null.
  • an upper-level node or donor node may also be configured by an upper-level node or donor node through semi-static signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be dynamically indicated by an upper-level node through dynamic signaling (for example, MAC CE or DCI).
  • the MT resource corresponding to the resource is always available (that is, the second dynamic resource is configured or indicated as always unavailable).
  • the protocol may specify that the resource (specifically, MT resource) where the DCI is indicated will never be indicated as unavailable (or released) by another DCI, that is, the dynamic resource corresponding to the MT resource where the DCI is indicated It will never be indicated as available by another indication DCI.
  • the MT of the IAB node always detects the search space corresponding to another indicating DCI.
  • the protocol may specify that the resource where at least one of the multiple indicator DCIs is located (specifically, refers to MT Resource) will never be indicated as unavailable (or released) by another indication DCI, that is, at least one dynamic resource corresponding to the MT resource where the indication DCI is located will never be indicated as available by another indication DCI.
  • the location of the indication DCI (for example, determined by the search space set configuration) and its corresponding indication area information (at least two of the indication area start time information, duration information, and end time information) Among them, some of the information may be obtained implicitly) can be configured by different signaling (such as different RRC).
  • the IAB node needs to determine the association relationship between the indicated DCI and the indicated area, that is, determine each indicated DCI The indicated indication area, or determine which indication DCI indicates an indication area. At this time, it can be determined as follows:
  • the interval between the time domain resource where each indication DCI is located and the start time of the corresponding indication area can be within a certain time domain.
  • the indication delay can be between the first threshold and the second threshold. Therefore, the indication area indicated by the DCI can be determined by the position of the indication DCI and the above threshold information. Further, if there are multiple indication areas that meet the conditions, the one that is closest to the position of the indication DCI (or the one with the earliest start time) among the multiple indication areas can be determined as the indication to be indicated. area.
  • additional signaling can also be used to indicate the association relationship between multiple indicator DCIs and multiple indicator areas.
  • the IAB node can obtain the additional signaling from the superior node, and determine each indicator DCI according to the additional signaling. The corresponding indication area.
  • Figure 11 shows an example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • Figure 11 includes three nodes.
  • the first node can be a donor node or an IAB node.
  • the second and third nodes are IAB nodes.
  • Each node can include one or more lower-level nodes, and the upper-level node
  • the indication information (for example, indication DCI) dynamically indicates resources for the lower-level nodes, and the lower-level nodes can perform dynamic resource indications for the lower-level nodes.
  • the IAB node may have multiple upper-level nodes.
  • the second node (MT) receives the indication DCI sent by the first node (DU) (bar C in FIG. 11 indicates the time domain resource where the DCI is located), and the second node MT will detect the indicated DCI at a specific time domain position according to the configuration of the search space set. After receiving the indicated DCI, the second node will generate a new indicated DCI according to the content of the received indicated DCI, and will Instruct the DCI to send to the third node. It should be understood that the second node may include multiple lower-level nodes, so the second node may send multiple new indicating DCIs, and the content of the multiple new indicating DCIs may be the same or different.
  • the indication DCI received by each node (MT) from the upper node is called the first indication DCI
  • the indication DCI sent to the lower node is called the second indication. DCI.
  • the area indicated by the first indication DCI is referred to as the first indication area
  • the area indicated by the second indication DCI is referred to as the second indication area.
  • the first indication DCI received by the third node (MT) is the second indication DCI sent by the second node.
  • the semi-static signal between the second node and the third node may be configured in the first
  • the semi-static signals include reference signals such as CSI-RS and SRS, and semi-static PDSCH, PUSCH, that is, physical channels such as PUCCH.
  • the second node may close the communication with the third node on the dynamic resource through the second instruction DCI.
  • the corresponding one or more second indication DCIs Depend on the corresponding one or more first indication DCI, or call this one or more first indication DCI and this one or more second indication DCI have an association relationship.
  • the following manner is used to define the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI having an association relationship.
  • the first indication area and the second indication area should also meet the following requirements:
  • the starting position of the second indication area is not ahead of the first indication area
  • the second indication area is the first second indication area that meets the condition (1).
  • first indicator area and the second indicator area having an associated relationship are generally discussed.
  • the indication of the second indication DCI to a part of the resources may need to be determined according to the first indication DCI.
  • the IAB node needs a certain processing delay from receiving the first indication DCI to sending the second indication DCI.
  • the processing delay includes the detection and decoding delay of the first indication DCI by the MT, and the interaction between the MT and the DU. And processing time delay, and the preparation time for the DU to send the second indication DCI, etc.
  • the processing delay required for the IAB node to receive the first indication DCI from the superior node to send the second indication DCI to the subordinate node is called the first delay.
  • the first time delay may be defined by a communication protocol, or may be reported by the IAB node.
  • the first time delay may be represented by the number of time slots and/or the number of symbols under a certain subcarrier interval. E.g. When the sub-carrier spacing is 120KHz, the first time delay is 28 symbols at most.
  • the interval between the first indicating DCI and the second indicating DCI having an association relationship should be greater than or equal to the first time delay.
  • the interval between the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI may be equal to the first delay, that is, the interval may be the processing delay.
  • multiple first indicator DCIs and multiple second indicator DCIs having an association relationship can be obtained.
  • the interval between the last first indication DCI and the first second indication DCI should be greater than or equal to the first delay.
  • the interval between at least one first indication DCI and one second indication DCI may be configured to be greater than or equal to the first time delay.
  • the second indication DCI of each node is determined according to the first indication DCI
  • the end time of the second indication area indicated by the second indication DCI and the end time of the first indication area indicated by the first indication DCI are within The time domain completely overlaps.
  • the start time of the second indication area and the first indication area may also overlap in the time domain.
  • the indication range for the lowest-level node should be determined first.
  • the indication range of the first indication DCI of the third node (that is, the second indication DCI of the second node) should be determined first, and then the first indication DCI of the second node (that is, the first node’s
  • the second indicates the indication range of DCI.
  • the first node since the first node is the uppermost node or the donor node, there is no first indication DCI, and the third node is the lowermost node, so there is no second indication DCI.
  • the indicating range of indicating DCI in FIG. 11 is equal to the period of indicating DCI.
  • the indication delay corresponding to the first indication DCI is indication delay #1
  • the indication delay corresponding to the second indication DCI is indication delay #2.
  • the length of indication delay #1 will be equal to indication delay #2 plus the time domain resources and processing where the second indication DCI is located. The length of the delay.
  • the first indication DCI of the upstream node may have a larger indication delay, which causes the dynamic indication to the upstream node (for example, the second node) to be not timely enough, making the effect of the dynamic indication unsatisfactory.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system, which does not cause problems such as delayed delivery.
  • Fig. 12 shows another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • the second node may periodically receive the first indication DCI sent by the first node, and periodically send the second indication DCI to the third node, and the second node may receive the first indication DCI and send the second indication.
  • the period of DCI can be the same.
  • the indication delay #1 and the indication delay #2 corresponding to the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI are equal, and the duration of the first indication area and the second indication area are also the same.
  • the indicated time delay #1 and the indicated time delay #2 can be independently configured or acquired, and the indicated time delay #1 and the indicated time delay #2 may have different values.
  • the first indication area and the second indication area can also be independently configured or acquired, and the two can have different values.
  • the durations of the indication delay #1 and the indication delay #2 corresponding to the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI are both greater than or equal to the first delay.
  • the indicating range of indicating DCI is equal to the period of indicating DCI. Specifically, the start time of the first indication area of the first indication DCI coincides with the start time of the time domain resource where the second indication DCI is located, and continues until the start time of the first indication area of the DCI in the next cycle, or , Continues until the start time of the time domain resource where the DCI is located at the second indication of the next cycle.
  • this application does not limit the relationship between the indication range of the DCI and the cycle of the DCI.
  • the indication delays of the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI are independently configured, that is, the value of the indication delay #1 does not depend on the value of the indication delay #2, so it does not There is a problem of delayed delivery.
  • the first indication area and the second indication area in FIG. 12 do not completely overlap in the time domain.
  • the end time of the second indication area is after the end time of the first indication area.
  • the second indication area can be divided into two parts, as shown in FIG. 12, the two parts are respectively an S area and an X area.
  • the start time of the S area is also the start time of the second indication area, and the end time of the S area overlaps with the end time of the first indication area in the time domain.
  • the start time of the X area coincides with the end time of the S area (or the start time of the X area coincides with the end time of the first indicator area in the time domain), and the end time of the X area is also the end time of the second indicator area. End Time.
  • the second node When the second node indicates the resource to the subordinate node, since the end time of the second indicator area is after the end time of the first indicator area, this also means that the time domain area (that is, X) is located after the end time of the first indicator area. Area), the first node has not yet performed a resource indication to the second node, and the second node needs to perform a resource indication to the third node.
  • the second node can only determine the available status of the dynamic resources on the S area of the second indication area, but cannot know the available status of the dynamic resources on the X area. If the second node decides the resource configuration of its DU before obtaining the MT resource configuration of the X area from the first node, and indicates the resource to the third node, there may be conflicts with the first node's subsequent resource indication for the X area problem.
  • the MT resources of the K third nodes in the X area need to be indicated by the second indication DCI of the second node, where K is a non-negative integer.
  • the K MT resources correspond to the K DU resources of the third node, and the corresponding DU resources may include dynamic resources, fixed resources, and unavailable resources.
  • the availability of the dynamic resource of the third node needs to be determined by the second indication DCI sent by the second node.
  • the K MT resources also correspond to the K DU resources of the second node, and the corresponding DU resources may include dynamic resources, fixed resources, and unavailable resources.
  • the availability of dynamic resources of the second node needs to be determined by the first indication DCI received by the second node.
  • the K value may be 0, that is, the indicated MT resource does not exist in the third node in the X area.
  • Figure 13 shows a schematic diagram of the resource configuration of the X area.
  • Figure 13 assumes a TDM scenario.
  • the DU of the third node includes a total of 4 soft resources.
  • the available status of the soft resources corresponding to the first, second, and fifth time slots is indicated by the second node, that is, in the X area
  • a total of It includes three dynamic resources (that is, the K value is 3), that is, the availability of the MT resources including three third nodes in the X area needs to be indicated by the second indication DCI sent by the second node.
  • the X area also includes three fixed resources, which are hard resources corresponding to time slots 0 and 4, and soft resources that are not indicated in time slot 3.
  • the second node first indicates the resources of the third node, and the first node does not know the content of the instructions of the second node at this time, so there may be conflicts with the first node's subsequent resource instructions to the X area The problem.
  • the DU of the third node will not communicate with the subordinate node in the second time slot, and the MT of the third node may Send a signal to the second node DU in the second time slot or receive a signal sent by the second node DU, and then if the first node instructs the second node that the MT resource corresponding to the second time slot is not released, under the TDM assumption, The DU of the second node cannot communicate with the third node in the second time slot, that is, a resource indication conflict occurs.
  • the resource indication conflict may cause the following consequences: (1) the communication failure between the third node MT and the second node DU; (2) the signal sent by the third node MT may cause unnecessary interference; (3) third The DU resources of the node are wasted.
  • the present application provides a method 200 for indicating resources, which can avoid the occurrence of the foregoing resource indication conflicts.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for indicating resources according to the present application.
  • the method 200 includes steps 210-240. The method 200 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 12-15.
  • the first node is an upper-level node of the second node
  • the third node is a lower-level node of the second node, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second node obtains resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the configuration of fixed resources and dynamic resources of the second node.
  • the fixed resources of the second node include hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated as available by the superior node (ie, the first node), while the dynamic resources of the second node include the available resources indicated by the superior node. State soft resources.
  • the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node is inferred from the resource configuration of the MT of the second node, that is, the fixed resource and dynamic resource of the second node are implicitly configured.
  • the second node can determine which soft resources of the second node will be indicated by the superior node.
  • the second node may obtain resource configuration information from the first node.
  • the resource configuration information may also include other information, which is not limited in this application.
  • it can also be used to indicate the transmission direction (D/U/F) of the MT resource and DU resource of the second node and the third node, the type of DU resource (soft/hard), the location of the NULL resource of the DU, etc. The length of the area, etc.
  • the above resource configuration information may be generated by the donor node and sent to the first node, and then sent by the first node to the second node, or generated by the donor node and sent to the second node.
  • the indication content of the resource configuration information acquired by the second node should be considered fixed without reconfiguration.
  • the fixed indication content of the resource configuration information means that the number of the soft resource indicated by the upper-level node is fixed, and it should not be understood that the available state of the dynamic resource indicated each time is unchanged.
  • the first indication area indicated by the first indication information periodically sent by the first node includes 6 time slots, where time slot 0, time slot 2 and time slot 4 correspond to soft resources of the DU.
  • the second node can know that the dynamic resources corresponding to timeslot 0, timeslot 2 and timeslot 4 need the timeslot number indicated by the first node.
  • the first node indicates the available status of the dynamic resources corresponding to time slot 2 and time slot 4 in each cycle, and the indication results of the available status of the dynamic resources corresponding to time slot 2 and time slot 4 may be different in each cycle. .
  • the second node receives the first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node.
  • the available states of dynamic resources include two states: available and unavailable.
  • the first indication information may specifically be the indication DCI described above.
  • the first indication information is also referred to as the first indication DCI below.
  • the second node receives the first indication information (ie, the first indication DCI) sent by its superior node (ie, the first node), the first indication information can indicate whether one or more dynamic resources on the first indication area are available .
  • the first indication information may explicitly indicate whether one or more dynamic resources on the first indication area are available, or may indicate implicitly, which is not limited in this application.
  • the explicit indication means that the first indication information directly indicates the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node.
  • the implicit indication means that the first indication information indicates the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node.
  • the second node determines the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU according to the available state of some resources of the MT indicated by the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, and all or part of the partial resources of the MT are in the time domain.
  • the above corresponds to the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node, and the first indication information can indirectly indicate the availability of the dynamic resource of the DU (or the dynamic resource of the second node) by indicating whether to release the MT resource.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, A part corresponds to the unavailable resource of the DU of the second node in the time domain. At this time, regardless of whether the first indication information releases the MT resource, the corresponding DU unavailable resource is still unavailable.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, and some resources of the MT A part of MT corresponds to the hard resource of the DU of the second node in the time domain.
  • the first indication information releases this part of the MT resource, the corresponding DU hard resource is always Available;
  • the indication of this part of the MT resource by the first indication information will never affect the availability of the DU hard resource of the second node.
  • the first indication message always releases this part of MT resources.
  • the first indication information may also be used to indicate the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node on the first indication area.
  • the second node can determine the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the first indication information.
  • the second node before receiving the first indication information, the second node first needs to receive the configuration information of the first indication information.
  • the configuration information of the first indication information may include at least one of the following information:
  • the start time of the first indication area, the end time of the first indication area, the duration of the first indication area, the interval between the end time of the time domain resource where the first indication information is located and the start time of the first indication area (That is, indicate the time delay).
  • the configuration information of the first indication information may further include: resource identifiers of one or more resources to be indicated.
  • the resource to be indicated means the MT resource or the DU resource to be indicated; the resource identifier may be at least one of a symbol number, a slot number, a subframe number, and a system frame number.
  • the first indication information may further include a configuration type indication, and the configuration type indication is used to indicate whether the resource in the configuration information is incremental configuration or reconfiguration. If it is an incremental configuration, the first indication information contains only a small amount of increased or decreased dynamic resources, thereby reducing signaling overhead. In the reconfiguration, all previous dynamic resources configured through the first indication information will be ignored, and the dynamic resources in the configuration information will be completely used. It should be understood that the two types of configuration type indications can be used interchangeably, and this application does not restrict the use conditions of incremental configuration or reconfiguration.
  • the second node determines second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the resource availability status between the second node and the third node on the second indication area, the second indication area includes at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates The state of the at least one dynamic resource indicated by the first indication information is unavailable.
  • the resource between the second node and the third node can be understood as the resource used for communication between the second node and the third node, for example, it can be the MT resource of the third node, or the resource of the second node. DU resources.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of resources between the second node and the third node in the second indication area, which can be understood as the second indication information used to indicate the MT of the third node in the second indication area The available status of the resource.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of the resources between the second node and the third node on the second indication area, and can also be understood as the second indication information used to indicate the status of the second node on the second indication area The available status of the DU resource.
  • the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is the dynamic resource of the second node in the aforementioned X area.
  • the first indication information received by the second node from the first node is used to indicate the first indication area
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the second indication area to the third node.
  • the area located after the end position of the first indication area in the second indication area is the X area referred to here.
  • the second indication area may include two parts, an S area and an X area as shown in FIG. 12, respectively.
  • the S area is the overlapping part of the second indicator area and the first indicator area
  • the X area is the part of the second indicator area located after the end time of the first indicator area in the time domain.
  • the first indicator information cannot be used for the X area.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the availability status of some or all of the dynamic resources in the second indication area, that is, the second indication information is used to indicate the availability of dynamic resources in the S area of the second indication area.
  • the status also indicates the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area of the second indication area.
  • the available state of the dynamic resource in the S area is determined according to the available state of the dynamic resource in the first indication area indicated by the first indication information. It is understandable that since the S area is the overlapping part of the first indication area and the second indication area, the second node determines the available status of the dynamic resources of the third node in the S area according to the first indication information, and then further The third node indicates that it will not conflict with the available state of the dynamic resource in the first indication area of the second node indicated by the first indication information.
  • the first indication information sent by the first node to the second node only indicates the end time of the first indication area. For those located after the end time of the first indication area The time domain resource is not indicated in the first indication information.
  • the second node indicates the availability status of the dynamic resources of the third node, it needs to indicate the availability status of the dynamic resources in the X area after the end time of the first indication area. In other words, when the first node has not yet indicated to the second node the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area, the second node needs to indicate the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area to the subordinate node in advance.
  • the second node blindly indicates the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area to the third node without considering the first node’s indication of the dynamic resources in the X area, it may follow up with the first node on the X area.
  • the dynamic resource indicates conflicts.
  • the second indication information indicates that the state of the at least one dynamic resource that is not indicated by the first indication information is unavailable, so that no resource indication conflict problem occurs.
  • Fig. 15 shows an example of an X area resource configuration.
  • the second node in area X includes three soft resources corresponding to time slots 0, 2, and 4, where the second node can know the two soft resources corresponding to time slots 2 and 4 according to resource configuration information.
  • the soft resource will be indicated by the first node, that is, in the X area, the second node includes two dynamic resources corresponding to the second and fourth time slots.
  • the second indication information may indicate that the status of the above two dynamic resources is unavailable. Specifically, the second indication information may indicate that the MT resources of the second and fourth time slots of the third node are unavailable. At this time, no matter what the result of the indication of the above two dynamic resources by the first node in the future (the indication is available or unavailable), the problem of resource indication conflict will not arise.
  • the second indication information does not indicate to the third node the available status of the dynamic resources not indicated by the first indication information. That is, the indication resource of the second indication information does not include dynamic resources that are not indicated by the first indication information; in other words, the indication resource of the second indication information only includes the fixed resources of the second node in the X area.
  • the second indication area further includes Y fixed resources, and the second indication information indicates that the availability status of Z of the Y fixed resources is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are integers greater than or equal to 0 , And Z is less than or equal to Y.
  • the Y fixed resources not indicated by the first indication information may be fixed resources of the second node in the X area.
  • the second node includes a total of four fixed resources of time slots 0, 1, 3, and 5 (that is, the Y value is 4), where the 0th time slot corresponds to the second node that will not be indicated by the first node Soft resources, the first time slots 1, 3, and 5 are hard resources.
  • the second indication information may indicate the availability status of 0, 1, or more of the above four fixed resources, for example, indicate that they are available or unavailable. As shown in FIG. 15, the second indication information may indicate the fixed resources corresponding to the 0th and 1st time slots (that is, the Z value is 2). Specifically, the second indication information may indicate whether the MT resources of the 0th and 1st time slots of the third node are available or unavailable.
  • the DU resources of the third node corresponding to the Z fixed resources may be dynamic resources of the third node.
  • step 240 the second node sends second indication information to the third node.
  • the behavior of the third node after receiving the second indication information sent by the second node may be consistent with the behavior of the second node after receiving the first indication information. I will not repeat them here.
  • the above describes the resource indication method provided by this application mainly from the perspective of the second node.
  • the processing procedures of the first node and the third node have a corresponding relationship with the processing procedures of the second node.
  • the second node receives from the first node.
  • the first indication information means that the first node sends the first indication information to the second node;
  • the second node sends the second indication information to the third node, which means that the third node receives the second indication information from the second node. Therefore, even if the processing procedures of the first node and the third node are not clearly stated in some places above, those skilled in the art can clearly understand the processing procedures of the first node and the third node based on the processing procedures of the second node.
  • the second node obtains its own resource configuration information, and receives from the upper-level node the first indication information indicating the available status of the dynamic resource of the second node in the first indication area.
  • the second node determines how to instruct the subordinate node according to its resource configuration information. Since the resource configuration of the second node is fixed, even if instructions are given to subordinate nodes in advance, subsequent instructions received will not conflict with previous instructions.
  • FIG. 16 shows the resource indication method 300 provided by the present application, which can also avoid resource indication conflicts.
  • the method 300 includes steps 310-340. The method 300 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 16-18.
  • the first node is an upper-level node of the second node
  • the third node is a lower-level node of the second node, which will not be described in detail below.
  • step 310 the second node obtains resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node.
  • the fixed resources of the second node include hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated as available by the first node, and the dynamic resources of the second node include soft resources that will be indicated as available by the first node.
  • the fixed resources of the third node include hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated as available by the second node, and the dynamic resources of the third node include soft resources that will be indicated as available by the second node.
  • the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node are inferred from the resource configuration of the MT of the second node and the third node, that is, the fixed resources of the second node and the third node And dynamic resources are implicitly configured.
  • the second node can determine which soft resources of the second node will be indicated by the superior node. At the same time, the second node can determine which third node soft resources need to be indicated according to the resource configuration information. Alternatively, the second node can determine which third node's MT resources need to be indicated according to the resource configuration information.
  • the second node does not have the complete fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the third node.
  • the DU resource of the third node corresponding to a part of the MT resources of the third node indicated by the second node may not be a dynamic resource, for example, it may be an unavailable resource or a hard resource of the DU.
  • the resource configuration information of the second node and the third node is sent by the first node to the second node through different signaling.
  • the second node receives the first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node.
  • Step 320 can be understood with reference to step 220 in the method 200, and details are not described herein again.
  • the second node determines second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the availability of one or more of the dynamic resources on the second indication area of the third node.
  • the second indication area includes the first area, the first area includes K dynamic resources, the first area is located after the end position of the first indication area, and K is a non-negative integer.
  • the first area may be the aforementioned X area.
  • the resource configuration information in the aforementioned method 200 is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node.
  • the resource configuration information may indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node.
  • the determination of the second indication information in this embodiment comprehensively considers the possible impact of the configuration of the fixed resources and dynamic resources of the third node.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the second indication area of the third node, which can be understood as the second indication information indicating the third node
  • the method for determining the second indication information will be discussed below from the perspective of the MT resource of the third node.
  • the MT resource of the third node indicated by the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node is orthogonal to the dynamic resource of the second node that will be indicated by the first node.
  • the dynamic resource of the DU of the third node indicated by the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node is orthogonal to the dynamic resource of the second node that will be indicated by the first node.
  • the first node will indicate the available status of some or all of the dynamic resources in the first indication area.
  • the second node can know which soft resources need to be indicated by the first node according to the resource configuration information of the second node. Therefore, when the second node indicates to the third node the available status of the MT resources in the X area in advance, it will always release the MT resources corresponding to the DU resources that may be indicated by the first node after the first indication area (or indicate as Unavailable), you can avoid conflicts.
  • the second node may determine the available status (whether released) of the MT resources of the K third nodes contained in the X area according to the resource configuration information, and the K MT resources corresponding to the second node DU in the time domain
  • the time domain resource belongs to the fixed resource included in the resource configuration information of the second node.
  • the second node may determine the second indication information according to the determined availability status of the K MT resources, or the second node may determine the second indication information according to the determined K MT resources.
  • the available status of the MT resource is generated and the second indication information is sent to the third node.
  • Fig. 17 shows an example of the resource allocation of the X area.
  • the second node determines the available status of the K MT resources contained in the X area of the third node according to the resource configuration information. For example, it may be determined that one or more of the K MT resources are available, and the rest Is not available.
  • the dynamic resources of the second node that is, the soft resources of the DU of the second node corresponding to time slots 0, 2, and 4
  • the to-be-indicated MT resources of the third node that is, the first 1, 3, and 5
  • the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the time slot, where the K value is 3 is orthogonal in the time domain, so that the first indication information of the next cycle (that is, the second first indication DCI of the second node in Figure 12) )
  • the second indication information that is, the first second indication DCI of the second node in FIG. 12
  • the second indication information can indicate that K MT resources are determined For example, it may indicate that one or more of the K resources are available, and the rest are unavailable.
  • the dynamic resource of the second node and the MT resource to be instructed of the third node are orthogonal in the time domain. It can be understood that the dynamic resource of the second node and the MT resource to be instructed of the third node are staggered in the time domain and do not occur. Overlap (or rather, not correspond).
  • the MT resource (indicated by the first node to the second node) and the DU resource (indicated by the second node to the third node) of the second node satisfy the time division multiplexing, or do not violate the half-duplex constraint.
  • the dynamic resource of the third node corresponds to the fixed resource of the second node in the time domain, or the MT resource that the third node will be instructed corresponds to the fixed resource of the second node DU in the time domain.
  • the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the dynamic resource indicated by the second node will not be indicated.
  • the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the MT resources of the K third nodes (each of them) in the time domain can be configured to belong to the fixed resources (included in the resource configuration information) of the second node.
  • the fixed resource of the second node will not be indicated by the first indication information, or the fixed resource of the second node is always available. Therefore, the second indication information can correspond to the time domain resource of the third node in the time domain. Give instructions.
  • the second node may determine the available status of the MT resources of the K third nodes contained in the X area according to the resource configuration information, and determine the second indication information according to the available status of the K resources.
  • the MT resource of the third node indicated by the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node and the dynamic resource to be indicated by the first node are not orthogonal. However, it is possible to avoid conflicts by making some constraints on the content of the instructions of the second node.
  • the second node may indicate N of the MT resources of the K third nodes contained in the X area as unavailable according to the resource configuration information, or the second node may release the MT resources of the N third nodes ,
  • the time domain resources of the second node DU corresponding to the N MT resources in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources included in the resource configuration information of the second node, and N is a non-negative integer less than or equal to K, and the second node
  • the second indication information is determined according to the available status of the K MT resources. In other words, the second node generates and sends second indication information to the third node according to the available status of the K MT resources.
  • FIG. 18 shows another example of the resource configuration of the X area.
  • the second node determines the available status of the K MT resources contained in the X area of the third node according to the resource configuration information.
  • the K MT resources of the third node and the dynamic resources of the second node are orthogonal in the time domain.
  • This embodiment will discuss the K MT resources of the third node. It is not orthogonal to the dynamic resources in the second node in the time domain.
  • a part (ie, N) of the K MT resources of the third node correspond to the time domain resources of the second node in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources of the second node (included in the resource configuration information), or, All of the K MT resources of the third node corresponding to the time domain resources of the second node in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources of the second node.
  • the dynamic resource of the second node can be configured as the soft resource of the DU of the second node corresponding to time slots 0, 2, and 4, and the to-be-indicated MT resource of the third node can be configured as
  • the MT resources of the third node corresponding to the 0-5th time slots, that is, the 6th time slots 0-5 of the third node are all to-be-indicated resources of the MT of the third node.
  • the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the first, third, and fifth time slots of the third node in the time domain belong to the fixed resources of the second node DU. Therefore, the second indication information can arbitrarily determine the above three (ie The difference between K and N) the available status of the MT resource. For example, it can be determined that one or more of the three resources are available, and the rest are unavailable.
  • the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the 0th, 2nd, and 4th time slots of the third node in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources of the second node DU.
  • the indication of the time slot (that is, the content of the second indication information) should be restricted.
  • the protocol may specify that the MT resources of the third node of the third node are indicated as unavailable (released) for the aforementioned N (ie, the 0th, 2nd, and 4th time slots), or the corresponding Nth
  • N ie, the 0th, 2nd, and 4th time slots
  • the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the soft resource indicated by the second node may also be indicated, and at this time, it may indicate that the MT resource of the third node is unavailable.
  • the second node may determine the second indication information according to the availability (available or unavailable) of K-N (that is, the difference between K and N) MT resources and the availability (unavailable) of the N MT resources.
  • the indication of the aforementioned N dynamic resources of the second node may also be limited.
  • the protocol may specify that the above-mentioned N dynamic resources (explicit or implicit) of the second node are indicated as available.
  • the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the soft resource indicated by the second node may also be indicated.
  • the protocol can specify that the N dynamic resources indicated by the second node are unavailable.
  • the second indication information can arbitrarily indicate the availability status of the above N dynamic resources. For example, it can be determined that One or more are available, and the rest are unavailable.
  • the second indication information can arbitrarily indicate the available status of the K dynamic resources, for example, it can indicate that one or more of the K resources are available, and the rest are unavailable.
  • the second node may determine the second indication information according to the available status of the K dynamic resources.
  • the second node can indicate the availability (available or unavailable) of the MT resource through the second indication information or other dynamic signaling;
  • the second node can indicate that the availability of the MT resource is unavailable through the second indication information or other dynamic signaling, or the second node No indication of the availability of the MT resource;
  • the second node may indicate that the availability of the MT resource is unavailable through the second indication information or other dynamic signaling, or the second node may not indicate the availability of the MT resource;
  • the second node can indicate the availability (available or unavailable) of the MT resource through the second indication information.
  • the second node can pass The second indication information indicates that the availability of the MT resource is unavailable, or the second node does not indicate the availability of the MT resource.
  • the indication that the second node has not obtained the first indication information for the dynamic resource indicates that the second node has not received the corresponding first indication information, or the second node has received the corresponding first indication information
  • the time does not exceed a threshold, and the threshold includes decoding delay, protocol-defined delay, etc.
  • the first node does not have the content of the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node.
  • the second node may also send part or all of the second indication information to the first node.
  • this part or all of the information may include: related information of the second indication area (for example, start time, end time, duration, indication delay, etc.), the resource identifier of the dynamic resource of the third node, and the information of the X area Identification of dynamic resources, etc.
  • the dynamic resources of the second node or the third node can be locked through locking signaling.
  • the second node It is considered that the above dynamic resources will always be indicated as available or always indicated as unavailable.
  • the second node will always think that the lower-level node will use or not use this resource.
  • the locking signaling can be transmitted through various signaling, such as MAC CE.
  • the locked resource may also be an MT resource.
  • the first node sends signaling to the second node, indicating that several MT resources of the second node are locked. Then the second node thinks that these resources will always be released, or will never be released.
  • step 240 the second node sends second indication information to the third node.
  • the DU of the second node sends the second indication information to the MT of the third node.
  • the protocol may stipulate: The time domain resource (specifically, the DU resource of the second node) where the second indication message is located will never be indicated as unavailable by the first indication message.
  • the second node in the embodiment of the present application obtains resource configuration information, which can indicate the resource configuration of itself and the third node, and receives from the upper-level node the second node indicating the availability status of the dynamic resources of the second node in the first indication area.
  • resource configuration information can indicate the resource configuration of itself and the third node
  • One instruction information When the resource that the second node needs to indicate to the subordinate node exceeds the instruction of the superior node, the second node determines how to instruct the subordinate node according to the resource configuration information. Since the resource configuration of the second node and the third node is fixed, even if an instruction is given to the subordinate node in advance, the subsequent received instruction will not conflict with the previous instruction.
  • Fig. 19 shows another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • this application has multiple (for example, two) indicator DCIs that collectively indicate an indicator area, so that the robustness of the indicator DCI can be increased.
  • multiple indication DCIs have different indication delays.
  • the start position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI coincides with the start position of the resource where the first second indication DCI is located, and continues to the start position of the resource where the first second indication DCI is located in the next cycle, or That is, it continues until the start position of the indicator area of the first indicator DCI in the next cycle.
  • Fig. 20 shows another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.
  • the end time of the second indication area in this embodiment is also after the end time of the first indication area. Therefore, the X area will also appear in this embodiment, but this embodiment does not cause resource indication conflicts.
  • the indication area of this embodiment is different from the previous embodiment.
  • This embodiment still has indication delay.
  • the start position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI is not earlier than the transmission position of the resource where the second indication DCI is located, and the first indication area of the first indication DCI is The end time of is not longer than the second node receiving the resource location of the first indication DCI in the next cycle.
  • the first indication DCI will not indicate the dynamic resources of the second node in the X area. Therefore, even if the second indication DCI will indicate in advance the MT resources of the third node in the X area, There is no problem of resource indication conflicts, and the second node can arbitrarily determine the available state of the dynamic resources of the third node in the X area.
  • this embodiment has a problem that the indication range is reduced.
  • the indication DCI will not indicate the dynamic resources in this period of time (the range of this area may be large), so that dynamic The proportion of the indication range is reduced, which affects the performance of the dynamic indication.
  • one indication DCI corresponds to one indication area.
  • multiple indication DCIs can indicate a common indication area. In this case, the following restrictions can be made:
  • the start position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI is not earlier than the position of any one of the multiple resources for sending multiple second indication DCIs by the second node, for example, the first or last second indication Resource location of DCI;
  • the end position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI does not exceed the second node receiving any one of the multiple first indication DCI resources in the next cycle, for example, the first one or the last one Indicates the resource location of DCI.
  • the previous embodiments discussed various methods to avoid dynamic resource allocation conflicts.
  • the following discusses when the IAB node is not configured to indicate DCI, or is configured but does not detect the behavior of indicating DCI in the search space.
  • the MT of the second node can perform PDCCH monitoring on the search space of all optional resources. MT resource conflicting with the fixed resource of the DU of the second node;
  • PUSCH transmission and/or PUCCH transmission are performed according to the scheduling of the first node.
  • the second node may receive a reference signal configured by a higher layer, such as a CSI-RS;
  • the second node does not send a reference signal configured by a higher layer, such as an SRS.
  • the following discusses the sending behavior of the second indicator DCI after the second node does not detect the first indicator DCI.
  • the IAB node when it does not detect the first indication DCI, it gives up sending the second indication DCI.
  • the IAB node when the IAB node does not detect the first indication DCI, its second indication DCI adopts an orthogonal indication, that is, the second indication DCI sent by the second node uses the second indication DCI corresponding to all its DU soft resources.
  • the MT resources of the three nodes are released.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus 500 for indicating resources provided in this application.
  • the device 500 includes a processing unit 510 and a transceiver unit 520.
  • the transceiver unit 510 is configured to obtain resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the configuration of fixed resources and dynamic resources of the device and the third node;
  • the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to receive first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the device, and the first node Is the superior node of the device;
  • the processing unit 520 is configured to determine second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information, the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of the resource between the device 500 and the third node in the second indication area, and the second indication The area includes at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates that the state of the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is unavailable;
  • the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to send second indication information to a third node, and the third node is a subordinate node of the device.
  • the processing unit 520 is specifically configured to: the second indication area further includes Y fixed resources that are not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates that Z of the Y fixed resources The available status is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are integers greater than or equal to 0, and Z is less than or equal to Y.
  • the dynamic resources included in the first indication area include the first dynamic resources
  • the one or more dynamic resources indicated by the first indication information include the first dynamic resources
  • the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to :
  • the third indication information indicating the available status of the first dynamic resource, the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information and the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the first indication information
  • the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; the available status of the first dynamic resource is determined according to the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information.
  • the device 500 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
  • the chip described in the embodiment of the application may be a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), and a central Processor (central processor unit, CPU), network processor (Network Processor, NP), digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), can also be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit, MCU, programmable controller ( programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit, CPU
  • Network Processor Network Processor
  • NP network Processor
  • digital signal processing circuit digital signal processor, DSP
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit, MCU, programmable controller (programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the processing unit 510 may be a processor.
  • the transceiver unit 510 may be composed of a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit 520 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver, and has both receiving and sending functions.
  • the transceiver unit 510 may also be an input/output interface or an input/output circuit.
  • the transceiver unit 520 may be a communication interface.
  • input and output interfaces, input interface circuits and output interface circuits may be a communication interface.
  • the apparatus 500 may correspond to the second node in the embodiment of the method for indicating resources provided in this application.
  • the units included in the apparatus 500 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or procedures performed by the second node in the method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to obtain resource configuration information, first indication information.
  • the processing unit 520 is configured to determine second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information.
  • the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to send second indication information to the third node.
  • the present application also provides a network device 1000, which is described below with reference to FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 1000 provided in this application.
  • the network device 1000 is used to implement the function of the second node in the method embodiment.
  • the network device 1000 includes an antenna 1101, a radio frequency device 1102, and a baseband device 1103.
  • the antenna 1101 is connected to the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 receives signals sent by other network devices through the antenna 1101, and sends the received signals to the baseband device 1103 for processing.
  • the baseband device 1103 processes the signals that need to be sent to other network devices and sends them to the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 processes the signals and sends them to other network devices via the antenna 1101.
  • the baseband device 1103 may include one or more processing units 11031.
  • the baseband device 1103 may further include a storage unit 11032 and a communication interface 11033.
  • the storage unit 11032 is used to store programs and data.
  • the communication interface 11033 is used to exchange information with the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the communication interface 11033 may be an input/output interface or an input/output circuit.
  • the network device 1000 in the above apparatus embodiment may completely correspond to the second node in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit included in the network device 1000 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the second node in the method embodiment.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 obtains resource configuration information and first indication information from the first node, and sends them to the baseband device 1103.
  • the baseband device 1103 determines second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information, and sends the second indication information to the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 sends second indication information to the third node.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 receives the third instruction information from the first node, and sends the third instruction information to the baseband device 1103.
  • the baseband device 1103 determines the available state of the first dynamic resource according to the third indication information.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations performed by the second node in any method embodiment. And/or process.
  • This application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations performed by the second node in the embodiment of the method for indicating resources provided by this application. And/or process.
  • the present application also provides a communication system, which includes at least a first node, a second node, and a third node, where the first node is used to perform operations performed by the first node in FIG. 14 or FIG. 16 and/ Or processing, the second node is used to perform the operation and/or processing performed by the second node in Figure 14 or Figure 16, and the third node is used to perform the operation and/or processing performed by the third node in Figure 14 or Figure 16 .
  • This application also provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operation and/or process executed by the second node in the method embodiment for indicating resources provided in this application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data that need to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data from the communication interface and processes them.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, which may specifically include an input interface and an output interface.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output circuit, which may specifically include an input circuit and an output circuit.
  • the memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may also be integrated with the processor.
  • the device 500 described in the above device embodiments may be a chip on the baseband device 1103, and the chip includes at least one processing unit and an interface circuit.
  • the processing element is used to execute each step of any method executed by the above network device (that is, the second IAB node), and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices.
  • the unit for the network device to implement each step in the above method can be implemented in the form of a processing unit scheduler.
  • the processing unit 11031 calls a program stored in the storage unit 11032 to execute the method executed by the first IAB node in the above method embodiment.
  • the storage unit 11032 may be the processing unit 11031 on the same chip, that is, an on-chip storage unit, or may be a storage element on a different chip from the processing unit 11031, that is, an off-chip storage unit.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more of them used to control the technology of the application Integrated circuits for program execution, etc.
  • the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, etc.
  • the processor can distribute control and signal processing functions of terminal devices or network devices among these devices according to their respective functions.
  • the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory.
  • the functions of the processor can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory can be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions
  • Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium accessed by the computer, etc.
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium
  • the units can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professional technicians can use different methods for each specific application to achieve the described functions.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be Integrate into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a method and device for indicating resources, the method comprising: a second node acquiring resource configuration information used for indicating the configuration of fixed resources and dynamic resources of the second node; the second node receiving first indication information that is sent by a first node and that is used to indicate the availability status of one or more of the dynamic resources in a first indication area of the second node, the first node being an upper layer node of the second node; according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, the second node determining second indication information used for indicating the availability status of resources between the second node and a third node in a second indication area, the second indication area comprising at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicating the status of the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information as unavailable; and the second node sending the second indication information to the third node, the third node being a lower layer node of the second node.

Description

指示资源的方法和装置Method and device for indicating resources

本申请要求于2019年03月15日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201910200130.2、申请名称为“指示资源的方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China, the application number is 201910200130.2, and the application name is "Method and Device for Indicating Resources" on March 15, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference in.

技术领域Technical field

本申请涉及接入回传一体化IAB技术领域,尤其涉及一种IAB系统中指示资源的方法和装置。This application relates to the technical field of access and backhaul integrated IAB, and in particular to a method and device for indicating resources in an IAB system.

背景技术Background technique

随着移动通信技术的不断发展,频谱资源日趋紧张。为了提高频谱利用率,未来的基站部署将会更加密集。此外,密集部署还可以避免覆盖空洞的出现。无线中继节点(relay node,RN)通过无线回传链路与核心网建立连接,可节省部分光纤部署成本。在新空口(new radio,NR)中,中继节点与一个或多个上级节点建立无线回传链路,并通过上级节点接入核心网。中继节点和UE之间建立接入链路上级节点可通过多种信令对中继节点进行控制(例如,数据调度、定时调制、功率控制等)。另外,中继节点可为一个或多个下级节点提供服务。中继节点的上级节点可以是基站,也可以是另一个中继节点。中继节点的下级节点可以是UE,也可以是另一个中继节点。NR的带内中继方案被称为一体化接入回传(integrated access and backhaul,IAB),而中继节点被称为IAB节点(IAB node)。IAB节点包括终端(mobile termination,MT)功能与分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)功能。其中,MT用于IAB节点与上级节点通信,而DU用于IAB节点与下级节点通信,With the continuous development of mobile communication technology, spectrum resources are becoming increasingly tight. In order to improve spectrum utilization, future base station deployment will be more intensive. In addition, dense deployment can avoid the appearance of coverage holes. The wireless relay node (RN) establishes a connection with the core network through a wireless backhaul link, which can save part of the fiber deployment cost. In the new radio (NR), the relay node establishes a wireless backhaul link with one or more upper-level nodes, and accesses the core network through the upper-level nodes. The upper-level node establishes an access link between the relay node and the UE can control the relay node through a variety of signaling (for example, data scheduling, timing modulation, power control, etc.). In addition, the relay node can provide services for one or more subordinate nodes. The upper node of the relay node can be a base station or another relay node. The subordinate node of the relay node can be the UE or another relay node. The NR in-band relay solution is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node (IAB node). The IAB node includes a terminal (mobile termination, MT) function and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) function. Among them, MT is used for the communication between the IAB node and the upper-level node, and DU is used for the communication between the IAB node and the lower-level node,

为了在接入链路和回传链路之间动态协调宽带,NR IAB将使用两级资源指示。具体地,两级资源指示是指,上级节点通过显式或隐式的方式为IAB节点的DU配置资源,资源类型至少包括soft和hard两种。其中,hard资源表示IAB节点的DU始终可用的资源,而soft资源的可用性,则依赖于上级节点的指示。IAB节点根据上级节点的资源指示,继续向其下级节点进行资源指示。In order to dynamically coordinate the bandwidth between the access link and the backhaul link, NR IAB will use two levels of resource indication. Specifically, the two-level resource indication means that the upper-level node configures resources for the DU of the IAB node in an explicit or implicit manner, and the resource type includes at least two types: soft and hard. Among them, the hard resource represents the resource that is always available to the DU of the IAB node, and the availability of the soft resource depends on the instruction of the superior node. The IAB node continues to give resource instructions to its lower-level nodes according to the resource instructions of the upper-level nodes.

但是,IAB系统中通常存在多级中继节点,而多级中继节点系统采用上述两级资源指示时会有可能造成资源指示的冲突。However, there are usually multi-level relay nodes in the IAB system, and when the multi-level relay node system adopts the above two-level resource indication, it may cause resource indication conflicts.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请提供一种指示资源的方法,可以避免IAB系统中多级IAB节点在资源指示上可能出现冲突的问题。The present application provides a method for indicating resources, which can avoid the problem of possible conflicts in resource indications of multi-level IAB nodes in the IAB system.

第一方面,提供了一种指示资源的方法,该方法包括:第二节点获取资源配置信息,资源配置信息用于指示第二节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置;第二节点接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示所述第二节点的第一指示区域上的一个或多个 动态资源的可用状态,第一节点为第二节点的上级节点;第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上第二节点和第三节点之间的资源的可用状态,第二指示区域包括未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源,第二指示信息指示未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源的状态为不可用;第二节点向第三节点发送第二指示信息,第三节点为第二节点的下级节点。In a first aspect, a method for indicating resources is provided. The method includes: a second node obtains resource configuration information, the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node; the second node receives the first node The sent first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node, the first node is the superior node of the second node; the second node The second indication information is determined according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information. The second indication information is used to indicate the available status of resources between the second node and the third node on the second indication area. The second indication area includes At least one dynamic resource indicated by an indication information, the second indication information indicates that the status of at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is unavailable; the second node sends the second indication information to the third node, and the third node is The subordinate node of the second node.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,包括:第二指示区域包括Y个第二节点的固定资源,第二指示信息指示Y个固定资源中的Z个的可用状态为可用或者不可用,其中,Y、Z为大于或者等于0的整数,并且Z小于或者等于Y。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, including: the second indication area includes fixed resources of Y second nodes, The second indication information indicates whether the availability status of Z of the Y fixed resources is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are integers greater than or equal to 0, and Z is less than or equal to Y.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示信息用于指示第一指示区域上的第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点根据该MT的部分资源的可用状态,确定第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态;或者,第一指示信息用于指示第一指示区域上的第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点根据第一指示信息,确定第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node on the first indication area, and the second node uses the first indication information and Before the resource configuration information determines the second indication information, the method further includes: the second node determines the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the available status of some resources of the MT; or, the first indication information is used to indicate The available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node in the first indication area. Before the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, the method further includes: the second node according to the first indication information To determine the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示信息的配置信息包括以下信息中的一种或多种:第一指示区域的起始时间;第一指示区域的结束时间;第一指示区域的持续时间;第一指示信息所在的时域位置和第一指示区域的起始位置之间的间隔;动态资源的资源标识,资源标识包括符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号中的至少一种;待指示MT资源的资源标识,资源标识包括符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号中的至少一种。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the first indication information includes one or more of the following information: the start time of the first indication area; the end time of the first indication area ; The duration of the first indication area; the interval between the time domain position where the first indication information is located and the start position of the first indication area; the resource identifier of the dynamic resource, the resource identifier includes symbol number, slot number, and subframe At least one of the number and the system frame number; the resource identifier of the MT resource to be indicated, and the resource identifier includes at least one of a symbol number, a time slot number, a subframe number, and a system frame number.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示区域上包括第一动态资源,第一指示信息指示的一个或多个动态资源包括第一动态资源,以及,该方法还包括:第二节点从第一节点接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息指示第一动态资源的可用状态,第三指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态与第一指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态不同,第三指示信息在时域上位于第一指示信息之后;第二节点根据第三指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态,确定第一动态资源的可用状态。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first indication area includes the first dynamic resource, the one or more dynamic resources indicated by the first indication information includes the first dynamic resource, and the method further The method includes: the second node receives the third indication information from the first node, the third indication information indicates the available status of the first dynamic resource, the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information and the first indication indicated by the first indication information. The available status of the dynamic resource is different, the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; the second node determines the available status of the first dynamic resource according to the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示区域上包括第二动态资源,第二节点在第二动态资源对应的第二节点的MT资源上从第一节点接收第四指示信息,第二动态资源对应的第二节点的MT资源通过协议被配置为始终可用,或者第二动态资源对应的第二节点的MT资源由第一节点通过一个不同于第四指示信息的指示信息被指示为始终可用。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first indication area includes a second dynamic resource, and the second node receives the second dynamic resource from the first node on the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource. Four indication information, the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is configured to be always available through the protocol, or the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is passed by the first node through a different value from the fourth indication information The instructions are indicated as always available.

第二方面,提供了一种指示资源的方法,该方法包括:第二节点获取资源配置信息,资源配置信息用于指示第二节点和第三节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置;第二节点接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第二节点的第一指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态,第一节点为第二节点的上级节点;第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第三节点的第二指示区域,第二指示区域包括第一区域,第一区域上包含K个动态资源,第一区域位于第一指示 区域结束位置之后,K为非负整数;第二节点向第三节点发送第二指示信息,第三节点为第二节点的下级节点。In a second aspect, a method for indicating resources is provided. The method includes: a second node obtains resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node; the second node Receive first indication information sent by a first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node, and the first node is an upper node of the second node ; The second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, the second indication information is used to indicate the second indication area of the third node, the second indication area includes the first area, and the first area includes K A dynamic resource, the first area is located after the end of the first indication area, and K is a non-negative integer; the second node sends second indication information to the third node, and the third node is a subordinate node of the second node.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,包括:第二节点根据资源配置信息,确定第一区域上包含的K个动态资源的可用状态,该K个动态资源在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点的资源配置信息中所指示的固定资源;第二节点根据该K个动态资源的可用状态确定第二指示信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, including: the second node determines that the first area contains The available status of the K dynamic resources of the K dynamic resources, the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the K dynamic resources in the time domain belong to the fixed resources indicated in the resource configuration information of the second node; the second node according to the K dynamic resources The available state of the resource determines the second indication information.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,包括:第二节点根据资源配置信息,将第一区域上包含的K个动态资源中的N个确定为不可用,所述N个动态资源在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点的资源配置信息中所指示的动态资源,N≤K,N为非负整数;第二节点根据该K个动态资源的可用状态确定所述第二指示信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, including: the second node includes the first area according to the resource configuration information N of the K dynamic resources in, are determined to be unavailable, and the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the N dynamic resources in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources indicated in the resource configuration information of the second node, N≤ K and N are non-negative integers; the second node determines the second indication information according to the available status of the K dynamic resources.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示信息用于指示第一指示区域上的第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点根据该MT的部分资源的可用状态,确定第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态;或者,第一指示信息用于指示第一指示区域上的第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点根据第一指示信息,确定第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node on the first indication area, and the second node uses the first indication information and Before the resource configuration information determines the second indication information, the method further includes: the second node determines the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the available status of some resources of the MT; or, the first indication information is used to indicate The available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node in the first indication area. Before the second node determines the second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, the method further includes: the second node according to the first indication information To determine the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示信息的配置信息包括以下信息中的一种或多种:第一指示区域的起始时间;第一指示区域的结束时间;第一指示区域的持续时间;第一指示信息所在的时域位置和第一指示区域的起始位置之间的间隔;动态资源的资源标识,资源标识包括符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号中的至少一种。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the first indication information includes one or more of the following information: the start time of the first indication area; the end time of the first indication area ; The duration of the first indication area; the interval between the time domain position where the first indication information is located and the start position of the first indication area; the resource identifier of the dynamic resource, the resource identifier includes symbol number, slot number, and subframe At least one of number and system frame number.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示区域上包括第一动态资源,第一指示信息指示的一个或多个动态资源包括第一动态资源,以及,该方法还包括:第二节点从第一节点接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息指示第一动态资源的可用状态,第三指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态与第一指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态不同,第三指示信息在时域上位于第一指示信息之后;第二节点根据第三指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态,确定第一动态资源的可用状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first indication area includes the first dynamic resource, the one or more dynamic resources indicated by the first indication information includes the first dynamic resource, and the method further The method includes: the second node receives third indication information from the first node, the third indication information indicates the available status of the first dynamic resource, the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information, and the first indication information indicated by the first indication information. The available status of the dynamic resource is different, the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; the second node determines the available status of the first dynamic resource according to the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一指示区域上包括第二动态资源,第二节点在第二动态资源对应的第二节点的MT资源上从第一节点接收第四指示信息,第二动态资源对应的第二节点的MT资源通过协议被配置为始终可用,或者第二动态资源对应的第二节点的MT资源由第一节点通过一个不同于第四指示信息的指示信息被指示为始终可用。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first indication area includes a second dynamic resource, and the second node receives the first node from the first node on the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource. Four indication information, the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is configured to be always available through the protocol, or the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is passed by the first node through a different value from the fourth indication information The instructions are indicated as always available.

第三方面,提供了一种指示资源的装置,该装置具有实现第一方面或第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a third aspect, a device for indicating resources is provided, and the device has the function of implementing the methods in the first aspect or the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof. The function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.

第四方面,本申请提供一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得网络设备执行第一方面、 第二方面或第一方面、第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a fourth aspect, this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, or any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect.

可选地,网络设备还包括通信接口。所述通信接口可以为收发器或者输入输出接口。Optionally, the network device further includes a communication interface. The communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.

第五方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面、第二方面或第一方面、第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored. When the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect, the second aspect, or the first aspect, The method in any possible implementation of the second aspect.

第六方面,本申请提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行第一方面、第二方面或第一方面、第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, this application provides a chip including a processor. The processor is configured to read and execute a computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the second aspect.

可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,存储器用于存储计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or wire, and the memory is used to store a computer program.

进一步可选地,所述芯片还包括通信接口。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface.

第七方面,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面、第二方面及第一方面、第二方面的任意一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the first and second aspects, as well as the first and second aspects. Any one of the possible implementation methods.

第八方面,本申请还提供一种通信系统,所述系统包括第一节点,第二节点以及第三节点,第二节点执行前述第一方面或第一任意一种可能的方法,或者执行前述第一方面或第一任意一种可能的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application also provides a communication system. The system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node. The second node executes the foregoing first aspect or any one of the first possible methods, or executes the foregoing The first aspect or any one of the first possible methods.

本申请提供的技术方案,IAB节点(即第二节点)获取自己和其下级节点(即,第三节点)的资源配置信息,并从上级节点(即,第一节点)接收指示该IAB节点在第一指示区域上的动态资源的可用状态的第一指示信息。当IAB节点确定需要向下级节点指示的资源超出了其上级节点的指示时,IAB节点根据自己的资源配置信息,确定超出了上级节点指示的资源如何向下级节点进行指示。由于IAB节点的资源配置是固定的,因此,即使IAB节点向其下级节点需要指示的资源超出了上级节点的指示,但是IAB节点根据资源配置信息,可以避开其上级节点后续一定会进行指示的资源,从而即使提前向下级节点进行指示,后续指示也不会和在前的指示发生冲突。In the technical solution provided by this application, the IAB node (ie, the second node) obtains resource configuration information of itself and its subordinate node (ie, the third node), and receives an indication from the superior node (ie, the first node) that the IAB node is The first indication information of the available state of the dynamic resource on the first indication area. When the IAB node determines that the resource that needs to be instructed by the subordinate node exceeds the instruction of its superior node, the IAB node determines how to instruct the subordinate node for the resource that exceeds the instruction of the superior node according to its own resource configuration information. Since the resource configuration of the IAB node is fixed, even if the resource that the IAB node needs to indicate to its lower-level node exceeds the instruction of the upper-level node, the IAB node can avoid the follow-up instruction of its upper-level node according to the resource configuration information Resources, so that even if instructions are given to subordinate nodes in advance, subsequent instructions will not conflict with previous instructions.

附图说明Description of the drawings

图1是适用于本申请的技术方案的IAB系统的架构图。Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an IAB system suitable for the technical solution of the present application.

图2是IAB系统的一个具体示例的示意图。Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the IAB system.

图3是IAB节点的结构示意图。Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an IAB node.

图4是LTE的中继系统中下行回传资源的分配的一个具体示例的示意图。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the allocation of downlink backhaul resources in the LTE relay system.

图5是IAB节点的资源配置的一例的示意图。Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of resource configuration of an IAB node.

图6示出了指示DCI的指示区域的一个示例的示意图。FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of an example of an indication area indicating DCI.

图7示出了多个指示DCI指示同一个指示区域的示意图。FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of multiple indication DCI indicating the same indication area.

图8是IAB节点的资源配置的另一例的示意图。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of an IAB node.

图9示出了指示DCI的指示区域的另一个示例的示意图。FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of another example of an indication area indicating DCI.

图10示出了指示DCI的指示区域的再一个示例的示意图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of still another example of the indication area indicating the DCI.

图11示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的一例的示意图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of an example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

图12示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的另一例的示意图。FIG. 12 shows a schematic diagram of another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

图13示出了X区域资源配置的一例的示意图。FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of an example of resource configuration of the X area.

图14是一种指示资源的方法的一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for indicating resources.

图15示出了X区域资源配置的另一例的示意图。FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of the X area.

图16是一种指示资源的方法的另一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for indicating resources.

图17示出了X区域资源配置的再一例的示意图。FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of the X area.

图18示出了X区域资源配置的再一例的示意图。FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of the X area.

图19示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的再一例的示意图。FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

图20示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的再一例的示意图。FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

图21是本申请提供的指示资源的装置的示意性结构框图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus for indicating resources provided by this application.

图22是本申请提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by the present application.

具体实施方式detailed description

下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.

本申请中所有节点、消息的名称仅仅是为了描述方便而设定的名称,在实际网络中的名称可能不同,不应该理解本申请限定各种节点、消息的名称。相反,任何具有和本申请中用到的节点或消息具有相同或类似功能的名称都视作本申请的方法或等效替换,都在本申请的保护范围之内,以下不再赘述。The names of all nodes and messages in this application are only names set for the convenience of description. The names in the actual network may be different, and it should not be understood that this application limits the names of various nodes and messages. On the contrary, any name that has the same or similar function as the node or message used in this application is regarded as a method or equivalent replacement of this application, and is within the protection scope of this application, and will not be repeated hereafter.

本申请实施例提及的通信系统包括但不限于:窄带物联网(narrow band-internet of things,NB-IoT)系统、无线局域网(wireless local access network,WLAN)系统、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、第五代移动通信(5th generation mobile networks or 5th generation wireless systems,5G)或者5G之后的通信系统,例如新空口(new radio,NR)系统、设备到设备(device to device,D2D)通信系统等。The communication systems mentioned in the embodiments of this application include but are not limited to: narrowband-internet of things (NB-IoT) systems, wireless local access network (WLAN) systems, and long-term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) systems, fifth generation mobile networks (5th generation wireless systems, 5G) or post 5G communication systems, such as new radio (NR) systems, device to device (device to device, D2D) Communication system, etc.

参见图1,图1是适用于本申请的技术方案的一体化接入回传(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)系统的架构图。如图1所示,一个IAB系统至少包括一个基站100,以及基站100所服务的一个或多个终端设备(terminal)101,一个或多个中继节点(也即,IAB节点)110,以及IAB节点110所服务的一个或多个终端设备111。通常,基站100被称为宿主基站(donor next generation node B,DgNB),IAB节点110通过无线回传链路113连接到基站100。宿主基站在本申请中也称为宿主节点,即,donor节点。Refer to FIG. 1, which is an architecture diagram of an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) system suitable for the technical solution of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, an IAB system includes at least one base station 100, and one or more terminal devices (terminal) 101 served by the base station 100, one or more relay nodes (that is, IAB nodes) 110, and IAB One or more terminal devices 111 served by the node 110. Generally, the base station 100 is called a donor next generation node B (DgNB), and the IAB node 110 is connected to the base station 100 through a wireless backhaul link 113. The donor base station is also referred to as a donor node in this application, that is, a donor node.

基站100包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved node base,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(home evolved NodeB,或home node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband Unit,BBU)、演进的(evolved LTE,eLTE)基站、NR基站(next generation node B,gNB)等。The base station 100 includes, but is not limited to: evolved node B (evolved node base, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC) , Base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband Unit, BBU), evolved (evolved LTE, eLTE) base station, NR base station (next generation node B, gNB) etc.

终端设备包括但不限于:用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理、无线局域网(wireless local access network,WLAN)中的站点(station,ST)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备、连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、 未来5G网络中的移动台以及未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)网络中的终端设备等中的任意一种。IAB节点是中继节点的特定的名称,不对本申请的方案构成限定,可以是一种具有转发功能的上述基站或者终端设备中的一种,也可以是一种独立的设备形态。例如,本申请的IAB节点也可以被称为中继节点(relay node,RN)、传输接收点(transmission and reception point)、中继发送接收点(relaying TRP)等。Terminal equipment includes but is not limited to: user equipment (UE), mobile station, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent, Station (ST), cell phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station in wireless local area network (wireless local access network, WLAN) Personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices, other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, mobile stations in the future 5G network, and public Any of the terminal devices in the public land mobile network (PLMN) network. The IAB node is a specific name of a relay node, which does not limit the solution of the present application. It may be one of the aforementioned base stations or terminal devices with a forwarding function, or may be an independent device form. For example, the IAB node of the present application may also be called a relay node (RN), a transmission and reception point (transmission and reception point), a relay transmission and reception point (relaying TRP), etc.

IAB系统还可以包括多个其它IAB节点,例如,IAB节点120和IAB节点130。IAB节点120是通过无线回传链路123连接到IAB节点110以接入到网络的。IAB节点130是通过无线回传链路133连接到IAB节点110以接入到网络的。IAB节点120为一个或多个终端设备121服务,IAB节点130为一个或多个终端设备131服务。图1中,IAB节点110和IAB节点120都通过无线回传链路连接到网络。在本申请中,所述无线回传链路都是从中继节点的角度来看的,例如无线回传链路113是IAB节点110的回传链路,无线回传链路123是IAB节点120的回传链路。如图1所示,一个IAB节点,如120,可以通过无线回传链路,如123,连接另一个IAB节点110,从而连接到网络。而且,中继节点可以经过多级无线中继节点连接到网络。应理解,本申请中用IAB节点仅仅出于描述的需要,并不表示本申请的方案仅用于NR的场景,在本申请中,IAB节点可以泛指任何具有中继功能的节点或设备,本申请中的IAB节点和中继节点的使用应理解具有相同的含义。The IAB system may also include multiple other IAB nodes, for example, the IAB node 120 and the IAB node 130. The IAB node 120 is connected to the IAB node 110 through a wireless backhaul link 123 to access the network. The IAB node 130 is connected to the IAB node 110 through a wireless backhaul link 133 to access the network. The IAB node 120 serves one or more terminal devices 121, and the IAB node 130 serves one or more terminal devices 131. In FIG. 1, both the IAB node 110 and the IAB node 120 are connected to the network through a wireless backhaul link. In this application, the wireless backhaul links are all viewed from the perspective of the relay node. For example, the wireless backhaul link 113 is the backhaul link of the IAB node 110, and the wireless backhaul link 123 is the IAB node 120. Backhaul link. As shown in Figure 1, an IAB node, such as 120, can be connected to another IAB node 110 through a wireless backhaul link, such as 123, to connect to the network. Moreover, the relay node can be connected to the network via a multi-level wireless relay node. It should be understood that the use of IAB nodes in this application is only for the purpose of description, and does not mean that the solution of this application is only used in NR scenarios. In this application, IAB nodes can generally refer to any node or device with a relay function. The use of IAB node and relay node in this application should be understood to have the same meaning.

另外,本申请中还涉及到如下基本术语或概念。In addition, this application also involves the following basic terms or concepts.

接入链路(access link):UE和IAB node或IAB宿主节点(IAB donor)之间的链路。或者,接入链路包括某个节点和它的下级节点进行通信时所使用的无线链路。接入链路包括上行接入链路和下行接入链路。上行接入链路也被称为接入链路的上行传输,下行接入链路也被称为接入链路的下行传输。Access link: The link between the UE and the IAB node or IAB donor node (IAB donor). Alternatively, the access link includes a wireless link used when a node communicates with its subordinate nodes. The access link includes an uplink access link and a downlink access link. The uplink access link is also referred to as the uplink transmission of the access link, and the downlink access link is also referred to as the downlink transmission of the access link.

回传链路(backhaul link):IAB node和IAB子节点(IAB child node)或者IAB父节点(IAB parent node)之间的链路。回传链路包括和IAB子节点或者IAB父节点的下行传输的链路,以及和IAB子节点或者IAB父节点的上行传输的链路。IAB节点向IAB父节点进行数据传输,或者接收IAB子节点的上行传输被称为回传链路的上行传输。IAB节点接收IAB父节点的数据传输,或者向IAB子节点进行的数据传输被称为回传链路的下行传输。为了对UE和IAB节点进行区分,IAB节点与IAB父节点之间的回传链路被又称为上级回传链路(parent BH),而IAB节点与IAB子节点之间的回传链路被称为下级回传链路(child BH)。Backhaul link: the link between the IAB node and the IAB child node (IAB child node) or the IAB parent node (IAB parent node). The backhaul link includes the downlink transmission link with the IAB child node or the IAB parent node, and the uplink transmission link with the IAB child node or the IAB parent node. The data transmission of the IAB node to the parent node of the IAB or the uplink transmission of the child node of the IAB is called the uplink transmission of the backhaul link. The IAB node receives the data transmission of the IAB parent node, or the data transmission to the IAB child node is called the downlink transmission of the backhaul link. In order to distinguish between UE and IAB node, the backhaul link between the IAB node and the IAB parent node is also called the parent BH, and the backhaul link between the IAB node and the IAB child node It is called the lower-level backhaul link (child BH).

在一些情况下,IAB节点的下级回传链路和接入链路被统称为接入链路,即下级节点被视作是上级节点的一个终端设备。应理解,图1所示的一体化接入和回传系统中,一个IAB节点连接一个上级节点。但是在未来的中继系统中,为了提高无线回传链路的可靠性,一个IAB节点,如120,可以有多个上级节点同时为一个IAB节点提供服务,如图1中的IAB节点130还可以通过回传链路134连接到IAB节点120,即,IAB节点110和IAB节点120都视为IAB节点130的上级节点。IAB节点110,120,130的名称并不限制其所部署的场景或网络,可以是比如relay,RN等任何其他名称。本申请使用IAB节点仅是方便描述的需要。In some cases, the lower-level backhaul link and access link of the IAB node are collectively referred to as the access link, that is, the lower-level node is regarded as a terminal device of the upper-level node. It should be understood that in the integrated access and backhaul system shown in FIG. 1, an IAB node is connected to an upper-level node. However, in the future relay system, in order to improve the reliability of the wireless backhaul link, an IAB node, such as 120, can have multiple upper-level nodes simultaneously providing services for an IAB node. The IAB node 130 in Figure 1 also It may be connected to the IAB node 120 through the backhaul link 134, that is, both the IAB node 110 and the IAB node 120 are regarded as the upper node of the IAB node 130. The names of the IAB nodes 110, 120, and 130 do not limit the scenarios or networks where they are deployed, and may be any other names such as relay, RN, and so on. The use of the IAB node in this application is only for the convenience of description.

在图1中,无线链路102,112,122,132,113,123,133,134可以是双向链路,包括上行和下行传输链路,特别地,无线回传链路113,123,133,134可以用于上级节点为下级节点提供服务,如上级节点100为下级节点110提供无线回传服务。应理解,回传链路的上行和下行可以是分离的,即,上行链路和下行链路不是通过同一个节点进行传输的。所述下行传输是指上级节点,例如节点100,向下级节点,例如节点110,传输信息或数据,上行传输是指下级节点,例如节点110,向上级节点,例如节点100,传输信息或数据。所述节点不限于是网络节点还是终端设备,例如,在D2D场景下,终端设备可以充当中继节点为其他终端设备服务。无线回传链路在某些场景下又可以是接入链路,如回传链路123对节点110来说也可以被视作接入链路,回传链路113也是节点100的接入链路。应理解,上述上级节点可以是基站,也可以是中继节点,下级节点可以是中继节点,也可以是具有中继功能的终端设备,例如D2D场景下,下级节点也可以是终端设备。In Figure 1, the wireless links 102, 112, 122, 132, 113, 123, 133, 134 can be bidirectional links, including uplink and downlink transmission links. In particular, the wireless backhaul links 113, 123, 133, 134 can be used by the upper node to provide services for the lower node, such as the upper node 100 is the lower node 110 provides wireless backhaul services. It should be understood that the uplink and downlink of the backhaul link may be separated, that is, the uplink and the downlink are not transmitted through the same node. The downlink transmission refers to an upper node, such as node 100, and a lower node, such as node 110, transmitting information or data, and the uplink transmission refers to a lower node, such as node 110, and an upper node, such as node 100, transmitting information or data. The node is not limited to whether it is a network node or a terminal device. For example, in a D2D scenario, the terminal device can act as a relay node to serve other terminal devices. The wireless backhaul link can be an access link in some scenarios. For example, the backhaul link 123 can also be regarded as an access link for the node 110, and the backhaul link 113 is also the access link of the node 100. link. It should be understood that the above-mentioned upper node may be a base station or a relay node, and the lower node may be a relay node or a terminal device with a relay function. For example, in a D2D scenario, the lower node may also be a terminal device.

参见图2,图2是IAB系统的一个具体示例。在图2所示的IAB系统中,包括宿主基站,IAB节点1,IAB节点2,UE1和UE2。其中,宿主基站和IAB节点1之间的链路,以及IAB节点1和IAB节点2之间的链路为回传链路。UE1和宿主基站之间的链路以及UE2和IAB节点1之间的链路为接入链路。See Figure 2. Figure 2 is a specific example of the IAB system. In the IAB system shown in FIG. 2, it includes a donor base station, IAB node 1, IAB node 2, UE1 and UE2. Among them, the link between the donor base station and the IAB node 1 and the link between the IAB node 1 and the IAB node 2 are backhaul links. The link between UE1 and the donor base station and the link between UE2 and IAB node 1 are access links.

参见图3,图3是IAB节点的结构示意图。如图3所示,移动终端(mobile-termination,MT)功能被定义为类似UE的一个组件。在IAB中,MT被称为驻留在IAB节点上的功能(或模块)。由于MT类似一个普通UE的功能,因此可以认为IAB节点通过MT接入到上级节点或网络。Refer to Figure 3, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of an IAB node. As shown in Figure 3, the mobile-termination (MT) function is defined as a component similar to the UE. In IAB, MT is called a function (or module) that resides on the IAB node. Since the MT is similar to the function of an ordinary UE, it can be considered that the IAB node accesses the upper node or network through the MT.

分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)功能被定义为类似基站的一个组件。在IAB中,DU被称为驻留在IAB节点上的功能(或模块)。由于DU类似一个普通基站的功能或者部分功能,因此,可以认为IAB节点可以通过DU允许下级节点、终端设备的接入。A distributed unit (DU) function is defined as a component similar to a base station. In IAB, DU is called a function (or module) that resides on the IAB node. Since the DU is similar to the function or part of the function of an ordinary base station, it can be considered that the IAB node can allow the access of lower-level nodes and terminal equipment through the DU.

带内中继一般具有半双工的限制,具体地,IAB节点在接收其父节点的发送的下行信号时不能向其子节点发送下行信号,而IAB节点在接收其子节点的发送的上行信号时不能向其父节点发送上行信号。In-band relay generally has the limitation of half-duplex. Specifically, an IAB node cannot send a downlink signal to its child node when receiving a downlink signal sent by its parent node, while an IAB node is receiving an uplink signal sent by its child node. It cannot send an uplink signal to its parent node.

下面结合图4介绍LTE的中继系统中配置回传资源的方法。The method for configuring backhaul resources in the LTE relay system is introduced below in conjunction with FIG. 4.

LTE的中继系统中,donor节点为中继节点半静态的配置回传资源。图4示出了LTE的中继系统中下行回传资源的分配的一个具体示例。在LTE中,donor节点以子帧(1ms)为单位为中继节点分配回传链路资源,分配周期为一个无线帧(10ms)。具体地,donor节点通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令将部分子帧指定为回传链路子帧。回传链路子帧的数量和位置可被重配,然而通过RRC信令的重配所需时间较长。In the LTE relay system, the donor node semi-statically configures the backhaul resources for the relay node. Figure 4 shows a specific example of the allocation of downlink backhaul resources in the LTE relay system. In LTE, the donor node allocates backhaul link resources to the relay node in units of subframes (1ms), and the allocation period is one radio frame (10ms). Specifically, the donor node designates part of the subframes as the backhaul link subframes through radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling. The number and positions of the backhaul link subframes can be reconfigured, but the reconfiguration through RRC signaling requires a longer time.

对于LTE中的中继节点,当某个子帧被配置为回传子帧时,中继节点需要在此子帧监测中继物理下行控制信道(relay physical downlink control channel,R-PDCCH)和/或接收物理下行共享信道(physical downlink share channel,PDSCH),因此无法在接入链路进行发送。如图4所示,子帧2、4、和6被配置为回传链路,则对应位置的接入链路上子帧2、4和6不可用。因此,LTE的中继为半静态的时分复用(time division multiplexing,TDM)资源分配。For a relay node in LTE, when a subframe is configured as a backhaul subframe, the relay node needs to monitor the relay physical downlink control channel (R-PDCCH) and/or It receives the physical downlink share channel (PDSCH), so it cannot be sent on the access link. As shown in FIG. 4, subframes 2, 4, and 6 are configured as backhaul links, and subframes 2, 4, and 6 on the access link at the corresponding positions are unavailable. Therefore, the LTE relay uses semi-static time division multiplexing (TDM) resource allocation.

下面介绍NR中IAB系统的资源分配方法。The following describes the resource allocation method of the IAB system in NR.

参见图5,图5是NR中IAB节点的资源配置的一例的示意图。其中,IAB节点的 MT资源可以被配置为下行(downlink,D),上行(uplink,U),灵活(Flexible,F)三种类型。这三种类型也是现有终端设备所支持的,因此可用现有信令指示。Refer to FIG. 5, which is a schematic diagram of an example of resource configuration of an IAB node in NR. Among them, the MT resource of the IAB node can be configured into three types: downlink (downlink, D), uplink (uplink, U), and flexible (Flexible, F). These three types are also supported by existing terminal equipment, so they can be indicated by existing signaling.

IAB节点的DU资源可以被配置为下行,上行,灵活和不可用(Null,N)四种类型。进一步地,DU的下行,上行,灵活三种类型的资源还可以被分为硬(hard,H)资源和软(soft,S)资源。其中,DU的hard资源,表示DU始终可用的资源。The DU resource of the IAB node can be configured as downlink, uplink, flexible and unavailable (Null, N) four types. Further, the DU's downlink, uplink, and flexible resources can also be divided into hard (hard, H) resources and soft (soft, S) resources. Among them, the hard resource of the DU indicates the resource that is always available to the DU.

DU的soft资源,表示DU是否可用需要依赖于上级节点(例如donor节点)的指示。The soft resource of the DU indicates that whether the DU is available depends on the indication of the upper-level node (for example, the donor node).

由上可见,NR中IAB节点DU上的资源分配依赖于上级节点的指示,通过半静态分配加动态指示的方式来进行DU资源的指示。这种资源分配方式和LTE系统中资源分配方法有很大的不同。It can be seen from the above that the resource allocation on the IAB node DU in the NR depends on the instruction of the superior node, and the instruction of the DU resource is performed through the semi-static allocation and the dynamic instruction. This resource allocation method is very different from the resource allocation method in the LTE system.

结合图3和图5,IAB节点的MT与上级节点的DU相连接,而IAB节点的DU与下级节点的MT相连接,在经过半静态(例如,通过RRC信令)的资源配置以后,IAB节点可以分别得到其MT资源和DU资源的资源配置。例如,可以包括MT资源和DU资源的传输方向(D/U/F),DU资源的类型(soft/hard),DU的NULL资源的位置等。应理解,上述相关配置可以通过显式信令获得,也可以通过隐式的方式获得。具体地,图5中示出了时分复用情况下MT和DU的资源配置示意图。With reference to Figures 3 and 5, the MT of the IAB node is connected to the DU of the upper node, and the DU of the IAB node is connected to the MT of the lower node. After the resource configuration of the semi-static (for example, through RRC signaling), the IAB The node can obtain the resource configuration of its MT resource and DU resource respectively. For example, it may include the transmission direction (D/U/F) of the MT resource and the DU resource, the type of the DU resource (soft/hard), and the location of the NULL resource of the DU. It should be understood that the above-mentioned related configuration can be obtained through explicit signaling or implicitly. Specifically, FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of resource configuration of MT and DU in the case of time division multiplexing.

结合图5以及下面的表1可以看出,对于IAB节点,其DU的hard资源(例如,第1、6、7、8时隙对应的DU资源)所对应的MT资源(例如,第1、6、7、8时隙对应的MT资源)为不可用。With reference to Figure 5 and Table 1 below, it can be seen that for an IAB node, the MT resource (e.g., the 1st, 1st, The MT resources corresponding to time slots 6, 7, and 8 are unavailable.

具体地,结合前面的介绍,IAB节点的MT共有三种类型的资源,而IAB节点的DU共有7种类型的资源,两两组合后,IAB节点的MT以及其对应的DU可能的行为如下面的两张表所示,其中表1为时分复用场景下的MT以及DU的各种可能的资源类型组合下的资源配置情况。表2为空分复用(spatial division multiplexing,SDM)场景下的MT以及DU的各种可能的资源类型组合下的资源配置情况。Specifically, combined with the previous introduction, the MT of the IAB node has three types of resources, and the DU of the IAB node has a total of 7 types of resources. After pairwise combination, the possible behaviors of the MT of the IAB node and its corresponding DU are as follows As shown in the two tables, Table 1 is the resource configuration under various possible resource type combinations of MT and DU in the time division multiplexing scenario. Table 2 shows the resource configuration under various possible resource type combinations of MT and DU in a spatial division multiplexing (SDM) scenario.

表1Table 1

Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000001

Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000002

表2Table 2

Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000003

Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2020078898-appb-000004

在以上表1和表2中,各标识的含义如下:In Table 1 and Table 2 above, the meaning of each symbol is as follows:

“MT:Tx”表示MT在被调度后应进行传输;"MT:Tx" means that the MT should transmit after being scheduled;

“DU:Tx”表示DU可以进行传输;"DU:Tx" means DU can be transmitted;

“MT:Rx”表示MT有能力进行接收(如果有信号需要接收);"MT:Rx" means that the MT is capable of receiving (if there is a signal that needs to be received);

“DU:Rx”表示DU可以调度下级节点的上行传输;"DU:Rx" means that the DU can schedule the uplink transmission of the lower node;

“MT:Tx/Rx”表示MT在被调度后应传输或接收,但传输和接收不同时发生;"MT:Tx/Rx" means that MT should transmit or receive after being scheduled, but transmission and reception do not occur at the same time;

“DU:Tx/Rx”表示DU可以进行传输或接收下级节点的传输,但传输和接收不同时发生;"DU:Tx/Rx" means that DU can transmit or receive transmission from lower-level nodes, but transmission and reception do not occur at the same time;

“IA”表示DU资源被显式或隐式的指示为可用;"IA" means that the DU resource is explicitly or implicitly indicated as available;

“INA”表示DU资源被显式或隐式的指示为不可用;"INA" means that the DU resource is explicitly or implicitly indicated as unavailable;

“MT:NULL”表示MT不进行发送且不必具有接收能力;"MT:NULL" means that the MT does not send and does not have to have receiving capabilities;

“DU:NULL”表示DU不进行发送且不接收下级节点的传输。"DU:NULL" means that the DU does not send and does not receive transmissions from lower-level nodes.

本申请主要考虑TDM的场景,但本申请方案也可扩展至SDM,频分多路复用(frequency-division multiplexing,FDM)或全双工等场景。对于TDM场景,DU的hard资源所对应的MT资源为不可用,具体地,在MT的不可用资源(例如图5中的第1、6、7、8时隙对应的MT资源)上:This application mainly considers TDM scenarios, but the solution of this application can also be extended to scenarios such as SDM, frequency-division multiplexing (FDM), or full-duplex. For the TDM scenario, the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU is unavailable. Specifically, on the unavailable resource of the MT (for example, the MT resource corresponding to time slots 1, 6, 7, and 8 in Figure 5):

(1)MT不期望上级节点会在这些资源上对其进行调度;(1) MT does not expect the superior node to schedule these resources;

(2)MT不在这些资源上进行参考信号的接收或发送;(2) MT does not receive or send reference signals on these resources;

(3)MT不在这些资源上进行物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)监测,即如果搜索空间与这些资源出现重合,则IAB节点的MT放弃重合的搜索空间监测。(3) The MT does not perform physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) monitoring on these resources, that is, if the search space overlaps these resources, the MT of the IAB node abandons the overlapped search space monitoring.

应理解,除了DU hard资源对应的MT不可用资源,MT还可能具有其余不可用资源。It should be understood that, in addition to the unavailable resources of the MT corresponding to the DU hard resource, the MT may also have other unavailable resources.

在上述半静态配置完成后,上级节点会继续通过动态信令(例如,下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI))为IAB节点动态指示其DU资源的soft类型资源的可用性,例如,上级节点采用专用的DCI或专用的DCI字段对IAB节点的soft资源的可 用性加以指示,为了方便描述,将动态信令包含的信息称为指示信息,将上述专用的DCI或专用的DCI字段可以统称为指示DCI。After the above semi-static configuration is completed, the upper-level node will continue to use dynamic signaling (for example, downlink control information (DCI)) to dynamically indicate to the IAB node the availability of soft-type resources of its DU resources, for example, the upper-level node uses The dedicated DCI or dedicated DCI field indicates the availability of the soft resources of the IAB node. For the convenience of description, the information contained in the dynamic signaling is called indication information, and the above dedicated DCI or dedicated DCI field can be collectively referred to as indicating DCI .

上述动态指示可以通过多种方式实现。The above dynamic indication can be achieved in a variety of ways.

在一种实现中,可以通过显式指示的方式进行。In one implementation, this can be done through explicit instructions.

例如,上级节点直接指示IAB节点DU资源的soft类型资源的可用性,此外,还可以同时指示部分(例如F类型)soft资源(例如,图5中第4、5时隙对应的DU资源)的传输方向等。For example, the superior node directly indicates the availability of the soft resource of the DU resource of the IAB node. In addition, it can also indicate the transmission of some (for example, F type) soft resources (for example, the DU resources corresponding to the 4th and 5th time slots in Fig. 5). Direction etc.

在另一种实现中,可以通过隐式指示的方式进行。In another implementation, it can be done through implicit instructions.

例如,上级节点指示IAB节点的MT资源(例如MT的可用资源)是否被释放(或者说,是否可用),IAB节点根据上级节点对上述MT资源的指示,确定自身的DU资源的soft类型资源的可用性。For example, the upper-level node indicates whether the MT resource of the IAB node (for example, the available resource of the MT) is released (or whether it is available), and the IAB node determines the soft type resource of its DU resource according to the indication of the upper-level node for the above-mentioned MT resource. Availability.

由于上级节点的指示信息直接由IAB节点的MT接收,因此本申请重点考虑隐式指示方法。具体地,可以通过指示释放或不释放IAB节点的MT资源(或者说,指示MT资源可用或者不可用),而IAB节点根据上级节点对其MT资源的指示结果来确定对应的DU资源的soft类型资源的可用性。与UE相同,IAB节点的MT资源可被配置为上行,下行和灵活三种类型。上级节点释放IAB节点的一个MT资源表示上级节点不在此资源与IAB节点进行通信,而上级节点不释放IAB节点的一个MT资源表示上级节点可能在此资源与IAB节点进行通信。在一种可能的实现中,IAB节点将被释放的MT资源视为不可用MT资源。Since the indication information of the upper-level node is directly received by the MT of the IAB node, this application focuses on implicit indication methods. Specifically, the MT resource of the IAB node can be released or not released (in other words, the MT resource is available or unavailable), and the IAB node determines the soft type of the corresponding DU resource according to the result of the upper-level node's indication of the MT resource Availability of resources. Like the UE, the MT resource of the IAB node can be configured into three types: uplink, downlink and flexible. The release of an MT resource of the IAB node by the superior node indicates that the superior node does not communicate with the IAB node on this resource, and the failure of the superior node to release an MT resource of the IAB node indicates that the superior node may communicate with the IAB node on this resource. In a possible implementation, the IAB node regards the released MT resources as unavailable MT resources.

无论采用显示指示还是隐式指示,动态指示信令可达到以下两个目的:(1)IAB节点可确定其DU soft资源的可用性;(2)IAB节点可确定其MT资源是否被释放,或确定MT资源的可用性。Regardless of whether explicit indication or implicit indication is used, dynamic indication signaling can achieve the following two purposes: (1) the IAB node can determine the availability of its DU soft resources; (2) the IAB node can determine whether its MT resources are released, or determine Availability of MT resources.

为了便于表述和理解,本申请可以通过描述释放或不释放MT资源来描述指示信息(例如,指示DCI)的行为。但应注意,本申请提供的技术方案也可以应用于显式指示,即,在TDM场景下,可以将释放MT资源等价于指示其对应的DU资源的soft类型资源可用,可以将不释放MT资源等价于指示其对应的DU资源的soft类型资源不可用。For ease of presentation and understanding, this application may describe the behavior of indicating information (for example, indicating DCI) by describing the release or non-release of MT resources. It should be noted, however, that the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to explicit indications, that is, in a TDM scenario, releasing MT resources can be equivalent to indicating that the soft type resources of the corresponding DU resources are available, and the MT may not be released. The resource is equivalent to indicating that the soft resource of the corresponding DU resource is unavailable.

应注意,隐式指示可同时应用于TDM场景和SDM(或FDM)场景,即对于SDM(或FDM)场景,IAB节点仍然可以根据上级节点对其MT资源进行指示,来确定其DU的soft资源的可用性。但是,上述显式资源指示(指示DU资源)和隐式资源指示(指示MT资源)的对应关系在不同的复用场景下可能有所不同。例如,对于TDM场景,MT和DU不能同时进行传输,因此MT的可用资源所对应的DU资源一定为不可用,反之亦然;而对于SDM场景,MT和DU可同时接收或同时发送,因此MT的可用资源所对应的DU资源有可能为不可用(当MT和DU资源的传输方向同时为下行或上行时),也可能为可用(当MT和DU资源的传输方向相反时)。It should be noted that implicit indications can be applied to both TDM scenarios and SDM (or FDM) scenarios, that is, for SDM (or FDM) scenarios, the IAB node can still indicate its MT resource according to the superior node to determine its DU soft resource Availability. However, the correspondence between the explicit resource indication (indicating DU resources) and the implicit resource indication (indicating MT resources) may be different in different multiplexing scenarios. For example, for the TDM scenario, MT and DU cannot be transmitted at the same time, so the DU resource corresponding to the available resource of the MT must be unavailable, and vice versa; for the SDM scenario, MT and DU can be received or sent at the same time, so MT The DU resource corresponding to the available resource of may be unavailable (when the transmission directions of the MT and DU resources are both downlink or uplink), or may be available (when the transmission directions of the MT and DU resources are opposite).

图5同样示出了一种通过指示DCI来进行隐式指示DU的soft资源的可用性的方法。FIG. 5 also shows a method of implicitly indicating the availability of soft resources of the DU by indicating DCI.

在图5中,IAB节点接收上级节点的指示DCI,更具体地,IAB节点的MT接收上级节点发送的指示DCI。其中,由于第0时隙的DU资源类型为NULL,因此其对应的第0时隙的MT资源为可用的资源,IAB节点的MT可以通过该时隙接收上级节点发送的指示DCI。In FIG. 5, the IAB node receives the instruction DCI from the upper-level node, and more specifically, the MT of the IAB node receives the instruction DCI sent by the upper-level node. Among them, since the DU resource type of the 0th time slot is NULL, the corresponding MT resource of the 0th time slot is an available resource, and the MT of the IAB node can receive the indication DCI sent by the upper node through this time slot.

该指示DCI能够指示是否释放一个或者多个MT资源,IAB节点接收到该指示DCI之后,可以通过该一个或者多个MT资源是否被释放来确定其对应的DU的soft资源是否可用。The indication DCI can indicate whether to release one or more MT resources. After receiving the indication DCI, the IAB node can determine whether the soft resources of the corresponding DU are available through whether the one or more MT resources are released.

例如,该指示DCI可以通过指示第2、3、4、5、9时隙的MT资源是否被释放(对应图5中上级节点DU和IAB节点MT之间的箭头,其中,实线表示不释放对应的MT资源,虚线表示释放对应的MT资源),来间接指示第2、3、4、5、9时隙的DU的soft资源是否可用(对应图5中IAB节点DU与下级节点MT之间的箭头,其中,虚线表示不可用,实线表示可用)。For example, the indication DCI can indicate whether the MT resources of the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots are released (corresponding to the arrow between the upper node DU and the IAB node MT in Figure 5, where the solid line indicates not to release Corresponding MT resources, the dotted line indicates the release of the corresponding MT resources), to indirectly indicate whether the soft resources of the DUs in the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots are available (corresponding between the IAB node DU and the subordinate node MT in Figure 5 Arrow, where the dashed line means unavailable and the solid line means usable).

具体地,该指示DCI可以指示不释放2、4、9时隙的MT资源(对应图5中的虚线箭头),则其对应的DU的soft资源为不可用,也就是说,DU不能在上述时隙上进行传输。Specifically, the indication DCI may indicate not to release the MT resources of time slots 2, 4, and 9 (corresponding to the dashed arrow in Figure 5), then the soft resources of the corresponding DU are unavailable, that is, the DU cannot be Transmission is performed on the time slot.

该指示DCI可以指示释放第3、5时隙的MT资源,则其对应的DU的soft资源为可用,也就是说,DU可以在上述时隙上进行传输。The indication DCI can indicate the release of the MT resources of the 3rd and 5th time slots, and the soft resources of the corresponding DU are available, that is, the DU can be transmitted on the aforementioned time slots.

根据MT资源是否被释放,给出IAB节点MT进行信号传输的行为:According to whether the MT resource is released, the signal transmission behavior of the IAB node MT is given:

(1)当上级节点(通过指示DCI)指示某个MT资源被释放后,IAB节点的MT认为上级节点不会在此资源调度PDSCH,物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)。也就是说,当IAB节点被调度PUSCH传输或PDSCH传输时,该传输不会位于释放后的MT资源;(1) When the upper-level node (indicating DCI) indicates that a certain MT resource is released, the MT of the IAB node thinks that the upper-level node will not schedule the PDSCH on this resource, and the physical uplink share channel (PUSCH). In other words, when the IAB node is scheduled for PUSCH transmission or PDSCH transmission, the transmission will not be located in the released MT resource;

(2)当上级节点(通过指示DCI)指示某个MT资源被释放后,IAB节点的MT不会在此资源进行PDCCH监测、信号状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)接收、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)发送、物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)发送等,也就是说,IAB节点不在被释放的MT资源进行执行高层配置的传输;(2) When the upper-level node (indicating DCI) indicates that a certain MT resource is released, the MT of the IAB node will not perform PDCCH monitoring, signal state information reference signal (channel state information-reference signal, CSI-RS) on this resource Reception, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission, etc., that is, the IAB node does not perform high-level configuration transmission on the released MT resources;

(3)当上级节点指示某个MT资源未被释放或被调度(包括调度为下行传输或上行传输),IAB节点的MT可在此资源进行PDCCH监测、CSI接收、SRS发送、PUCCH发送等,也就是说,IAB节点可在未被释放或被调度的MT资源进行执行高层配置的传输;(3) When an upper-level node indicates that a certain MT resource is not released or scheduled (including scheduling for downlink transmission or uplink transmission), the MT of the IAB node can perform PDCCH monitoring, CSI reception, SRS transmission, PUCCH transmission, etc. on this resource, In other words, the IAB node can perform high-level configuration transmissions on MT resources that have not been released or scheduled;

(4)当上级节点指示某个MT资源未被释放或被调度,IAB节点的MT认为上级节点可能在此资源上对其进行PDSCH调度或PUSCH调度。能够理解的,在实际应用中,上级节点也可能在此资源上不对IAB节点MT进行调度;(4) When the superior node indicates that a certain MT resource is not released or scheduled, the MT of the IAB node thinks that the superior node may perform PDSCH scheduling or PUSCH scheduling on this resource. It can be understood that in practical applications, the upper-level node may not schedule the IAB node MT on this resource;

(5)当MT的用于混合自动重传请求确认(hybrid automatic repeat request-ack,HARQ-ACK)反馈的PUCCH或PUSCH被配置或动态指示于一个MT资源时,IAB节点不期望此资源被指示DCI释放。(5) When the MT's PUCCH or PUSCH used for hybrid automatic repeat request-ack (HARQ-ACK) feedback is configured or dynamically indicated in an MT resource, the IAB node does not expect this resource to be indicated DCI released.

应理解,上述MT的各种行为仅作为示例,其并不构成对本申请MT的行为的限定。It should be understood that the various behaviors of the MT described above are only examples, which do not constitute a limitation on the behavior of the MT in this application.

对应地,IAB节点DU进行信号传输的行为包括:Correspondingly, the signal transmission behavior of the IAB node DU includes:

(1)当一个DU资源所对应的MT资源被指示为释放后,IAB节点可在此资源进行PDSCH和PUSCH等动态调度;(1) When the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is indicated to be released, the IAB node can perform dynamic scheduling such as PDSCH and PUSCH on this resource;

(2)对于TDM,当一个DU资源所对应的MT资源被指示为不释放或未被调度后,IAB节点不在此资源进行PDSCH和PUSCH等动态调度;对于SDM,当一个DU资源所对应的MT资源被指示为不释放或被调度后,IAB节点不在此资源进行违反半双工约束的PDSCH和PUSCH等动态调度;(2) For TDM, when the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is indicated as not being released or unscheduled, the IAB node does not perform dynamic scheduling such as PDSCH and PUSCH on this resource; for SDM, when the MT corresponding to a DU resource After the resource is instructed not to be released or scheduled, the IAB node will not perform dynamic scheduling such as PDSCH and PUSCH that violates the half-duplex constraint on this resource;

(3)当一个DU资源所对应的MT资源被指示为释放后,IAB节点可在此资源进行参考信号等半静态配置信号的收发;(3) After the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is instructed to be released, the IAB node can send and receive semi-static configuration signals such as reference signals on this resource;

(4)对于TDM,当一个DU资源所对应的MT资源被指示为不释放或未被调度后,IAB节点不在此资源进行参考信号等半静态配置信号的收发。对于TDM,当一个DU资源所对应的MT资源被指示为不释放或被调度后,IAB节点不在此资源进行违反半双工约束的参考信号等半静态配置信号的收发。(4) For TDM, when the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is indicated as not being released or unscheduled, the IAB node does not send and receive semi-static configuration signals such as reference signals on this resource. For TDM, when the MT resource corresponding to a DU resource is instructed not to be released or scheduled, the IAB node does not transmit and receive semi-static configuration signals such as reference signals that violate the half-duplex constraint on this resource.

在这里,半双工约束是指:当IAB节点的MT为发送状态时,DU不能为接收状态;而当MT为接收状态时,DU不能为发送状态。Here, the half-duplex constraint means that when the MT of the IAB node is in the transmitting state, the DU cannot be in the receiving state; and when the MT is in the receiving state, the DU cannot be in the transmitting state.

应理解,除了所述动态指示信令,IAB节点可能还需要其余配置信息确定其DU资源的可用性,例如,当一个DU资源被半静态的配置为不可用时,即使动态信令将其所对应的MT资源释放,IAB节点也不能使用此资源与下级节点进行通信。It should be understood that in addition to the dynamic indication signaling, the IAB node may also need other configuration information to determine the availability of its DU resources. For example, when a DU resource is semi-statically configured as unavailable, even if the dynamic signaling changes its corresponding The MT resource is released, and the IAB node cannot use this resource to communicate with subordinate nodes.

应理解,上述DU的各种行为仅作为示例,其并不构成对本申请DU的行为的限定。It should be understood that the various behaviors of the DU described above are only examples, which do not constitute a limitation on the behavior of the DU in this application.

可选的,考虑面向UE的参考信号等半静态配置信号,如果UE被配置了时隙格式指示(slot format indicator,SFI)指示DCI(即DCI格式2-0)的接收,且所述信号被配置在UE的灵活(F)资源,则所对应的IAB节点DU资源可以为soft资源;如果UE被配置了SFI指示DCI(即DCI格式2-0)的接收,但所述信号未被配置在UE的灵活(F)资源,则所对应的IAB节点DU资源仅能为hard资源;如果UE未被配置SFI指示DCI(即DCI格式2-0)的接收,则所述信号所被配置的资源对应的IAB节点DU资源仅能为hard资源。在上述约束下,IAB节点始终能接收或发送所述信号,或者,即使IAB节点不能接收或发送所述信号,IAB节点DU也可通过SFI指示DCI为UE关闭所述信号。Optionally, consider semi-static configuration signals such as UE-oriented reference signals. If the UE is configured with a slot format indicator (SFI) to indicate the reception of DCI (that is, DCI format 2-0), and the signal is The flexible (F) resource configured in the UE, the corresponding IAB node DU resource can be a soft resource; if the UE is configured with SFI to indicate the reception of DCI (that is, DCI format 2-0), but the signal is not configured in The flexible (F) resource of the UE, the corresponding IAB node DU resource can only be a hard resource; if the UE is not configured with SFI to indicate the reception of DCI (that is, DCI format 2-0), then the resource configured for the signal The corresponding IAB node DU resource can only be a hard resource. Under the above constraints, the IAB node can always receive or send the signal, or even if the IAB node cannot receive or send the signal, the IAB node DU can instruct the DCI to turn off the signal for the UE through the SFI.

可选的,donor节点或上级节点在配置指示DCI时,应保证IAB节点能使用被释放MT资源所对应的DU资源。对于下行传输,IAB节点DU应有充足的时间准备和发送PDCCH和PDSCH,而对于上行传输,IAB节点DU应有充足的时间准备和发送PDCCH,且IAB节点的下级节点或UE应有充足的时间准备和发送PUSCH。在IAB节点的MT接收到指示DCI之前,需要首先接收指示DCI的配置信息。例如,可以由上级节点通过RRC信令为MT配置。作为示例,本申请提供的指示DCI的RRC配置可以包含以下内容中的一个或者多个:Optionally, when the donor node or the superior node configures the DCI, it should ensure that the IAB node can use the DU resource corresponding to the released MT resource. For downlink transmission, the IAB node DU should have sufficient time to prepare and send PDCCH and PDSCH, and for uplink transmission, the IAB node DU should have sufficient time to prepare and send PDCCH, and the subordinate node or UE of the IAB node should have sufficient time Prepare and send PUSCH. Before the MT of the IAB node receives the indicating DCI, it needs to first receive the configuration information indicating the DCI. For example, the upper-level node can configure the MT through RRC signaling. As an example, the RRC configuration indicating DCI provided in this application may include one or more of the following:

(1)传输指示DCI的PDCCH的控制信道资源集合信息(control resource set,CORESET)和搜索空间集合信息(search space set);(1) Transmission of control channel resource set information (control resource set, CORESET) and search space set information (search space set) of the PDCCH indicating DCI;

(2)指示DCI所指示的MT资源集合或DU资源集合,包括指示资源的持续区间,指示资源的起始位置、指示资源的结束位置、指示资源的标识等;(2) Indicate the MT resource set or DU resource set indicated by the DCI, including the duration of the indicated resource, the start position of the indicated resource, the end position of the indicated resource, the identifier of the indicated resource, etc.;

(3)部分DU资源的传输方向,即DU的上行/下行/灵活配置;(3) The transmission direction of some DU resources, that is, the uplink/downlink/flexible configuration of the DU;

(4)部分MT资源的传输方向,即MT的上行/下行/灵活配置;(4) The transmission direction of some MT resources, that is, the uplink/downlink/flexible configuration of MT;

(5)部分MT资源的TCI状态,即MT接收PDCCH和/或PDSCH的波束信息,或空间准共址(quasi co-located,QCL)信息等。(5) The TCI status of some MT resources, that is, the MT receives PDCCH and/or PDSCH beam information, or spatial quasi co-located (QCL) information.

下面结合具体的实施例,详细介绍本申请提供的指示DCI的配置的设计细节。The following describes in detail the design details of indicating the configuration of the DCI provided in this application in conjunction with specific embodiments.

指示DCI可以指示一定时域范围(或者说,时域区域、时域资源)内的一个或者多个资源的可用性,本申请中将指示DCI所指示的时域范围称为指示区域。指示区域的持续时间可以由协议定义,或者由网络配置。The indication DCI may indicate the availability of one or more resources within a certain time domain range (or time domain area, time domain resource), and the time domain range indicated by the indication DCI is referred to as an indication area in this application. The duration of the indication area can be defined by the protocol or configured by the network.

在一个实施例中,指示区域的持续时间可以由上级节点或donor节点直接配置。In one embodiment, the duration of the indication area can be directly configured by the upper-level node or the donor node.

例如,上级节点或donor节点可以将指示区域的持续时间配置为时分双工(time division duplexing,TDD)配置周期P的n倍,n为大于等于1的整数。又例如,指示区域的长度可以等于指示DCI发送的周期。或者,指示区域的长度可以等于指示DCI对应搜索空间的周期。For example, the upper-level node or the donor node may configure the duration of the indication area as n times the time division duplex (TDD) configuration period P, where n is an integer greater than or equal to 1. For another example, the length of the indication area may be equal to the period of the indication DCI transmission. Alternatively, the length of the indication area may be equal to the period of the search space corresponding to the indication DCI.

此外,应理解,TDD配置周期可能由两个拼接的周期(记为P1和P2)组成,则指示区域的长度可能为这两个周期的和的n倍,n为大于等于1的整数。In addition, it should be understood that the TDD configuration period may be composed of two spliced periods (denoted as P1 and P2), and the length of the indication area may be n times the sum of the two periods, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

图6示出了指示DCI的指示区域的一个示例。参见图6,指示区域可以包括起始时间(或者说,起始时域位置)和结束时间(或者说,结束时域位置),例如,指示区域的起始时间和结束时间可以由资源标识直接表示,该资源标识(或者说,资源编号)可以是符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号等其中的任意一种或多种。容易理解的,指示区域通常包含自身的起始时间和结束时间。FIG. 6 shows an example of an indication area indicating DCI. Referring to Figure 6, the indication area may include a start time (or start time domain position) and an end time (or end time domain position). For example, the start time and end time of the indication area may be directly identified by the resource. It means that the resource identifier (or resource number) can be any one or more of symbol number, time slot number, subframe number, system frame number, etc. It is easy to understand that the indicator area usually contains its own start time and end time.

或者,指示区域的起始时间也可以通过指示DCI所在的时域资源位置和指示区域的起始时间之间的间隔间接确定,该间隔可以被称为指示时延。应注意,指示时延也可能通过其余方式描述,例如,指示时延也可能由指示DCI所在的时域资源位置和指示区域的起始时间之间的间隔间接确定。应理解,指示时延可以由上级节点(例如,donor节点)通过半静态信令配置,也可以由上级节点通过动态信令动态指示,还可以是协议定义的。半静态信令例如可以是RRC信令。动态信令例如可以是MAC控制元素(MAC control element,MAC CE)或者DCI。Alternatively, the start time of the indication area may also be determined indirectly by the interval between the time domain resource location where the DCI is indicated and the start time of the indication area, and this interval may be referred to as an indication delay. It should be noted that the indication delay may also be described in other ways. For example, the indication delay may also be indirectly determined by the interval between the time domain resource location where the indication DCI is located and the start time of the indication area. It should be understood that the indication delay may be configured by an upper-level node (for example, a donor node) through semi-static signaling, or may be dynamically indicated by an upper-level node through dynamic signaling, or may be defined by a protocol. The semi-static signaling may be RRC signaling, for example. The dynamic signaling may be, for example, a MAC control element (MAC CE) or DCI.

应理解,如果指示时延是协议定义的,那么指示区域的起始时间是可选的,可以通过指示DCI所在的时域资源和指示时延的大小推断出指示区域的起始时间。It should be understood that if the indication delay is defined by the protocol, the start time of the indication area is optional, and the start time of the indication area can be inferred by indicating the time domain resource where the DCI is located and the size of the indication delay.

作为一种可能的实现方式,指示时延可以为0,即指示DCI所在的时域资源位置和指示区域的起始时间的间隔为0,或者说,指示DCI所在的时域资源位置和指示区域的起始时间重合。类似的,可以通过指示区域的起始时间和指示区域的持续时间确定指示区域的结束时间。As a possible implementation, the indication delay can be 0, that is, the interval between the time domain resource location where the DCI is located and the start time of the indication area is 0, or in other words, the time domain resource location and the indication area where the DCI is located The start time coincides. Similarly, the end time of the indicated area can be determined by the start time of the indicated area and the duration of the indicated area.

一般情况下,指示DCI所在的时域资源为一个或多个(例如三个)符号,指示DCI所在的时域资源位置可以由指示DCI所占用符号的时域位置或指示DCI所占用符号中的一部分符号(例如,第一个符号或最后一个符号)的时域位置来表示。In general, the time domain resource indicating the DCI is one or more (for example, three) symbols, and the time domain resource position indicating the DCI can be indicated by the time domain position of the symbol occupied by the DCI or the symbol among the symbols occupied by the DCI. The time domain position of a part of symbols (for example, the first symbol or the last symbol) is expressed.

类似的,也可以通过指示区域的起始时间和结束时间确定指示区域。Similarly, the indication area can also be determined by the start time and end time of the indication area.

在图6中,IAB节点在MT的可用资源上接收指示DCI,并且确定指示区域内一个或者多个资源的可用性,该指示区域为一段连续的时域资源。In FIG. 6, the IAB node receives the indication DCI on the available resources of the MT, and determines the availability of one or more resources in the indication area, which is a continuous time domain resource.

作为一个实施例,指示DCI的指示区域也可以是离散的,例如,指示区域可以为多段不相连的时域资源构成,本申请对此并不限定。As an embodiment, the indication area indicating the DCI may also be discrete. For example, the indication area may be composed of multiple disconnected time domain resources, which is not limited in this application.

可选地,为了保证IAB节点接收指示DCI的健壮性,同一个指示区域可以由多个指示DCI进行指示。参见图7,图7示出了多个指示DCI指示同一个指示区域的示意图。在图7中,网络侧通过两个或者更多个相同的指示DCI(例如图7中的指示DCI#1和指示DCI#2)同时指示同一个指示区域,上述两个指示DCI可以通过不同的时域资源进行接收。其中,多个指示DCI是指至少两个指示DCI,或者说大于或者等于两个指示DCI。Optionally, in order to ensure the robustness of the IAB node in receiving the indication DCI, the same indication area may be indicated by multiple indication DCIs. Refer to FIG. 7, which shows a schematic diagram of multiple indication DCIs indicating the same indication area. In Fig. 7, the network side uses two or more identical indication DCIs (for example, indication DCI#1 and indication DCI#2 in Fig. 7) to indicate the same indication area at the same time, and the above two indication DCIs can pass different Time domain resources are received. Wherein, multiple indication DCIs refer to at least two indication DCIs, or greater than or equal to two indication DCIs.

可选地,多个指示DCI可以利用不同的波束进行传输,即传输多个指示DCI的PDCCH 位于不同的CORESET,或者传输多个指示DCI的PDCCH的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)具有不同的空间QCL关系。Optionally, multiple DCI indications can be transmitted using different beams, that is, multiple PDCCH indications that indicate DCI are located at different CORESETs, or multiple PDCCH indications that indicate DCI are transmitted with demodulation reference signals (DMRS). Different spatial QCL relationships.

应理解,每个指示DCI有其对应的指示时延,通过不同时域资源接收的两个指示DCI指示同一个指示区域,每个指示DCI的指示时延可能不同。例如,图7中指示DCI#1和指示DCI#2的指示时延不相同。It should be understood that each indication DCI has its corresponding indication delay. Two indication DCIs received through different time domain resources indicate the same indication area, and the indication delay of each indication DCI may be different. For example, the indication time delays indicating DCI#1 and indicating DCI#2 in FIG. 7 are different.

可选地,指示DCI可以不对指示区域内的所有资源进行指示。Optionally, the indication DCI may not indicate all resources in the indication area.

例如,指示DCI可以不指示DU的hard资源所对应的MT资源。作为具体的示例,当IAB节点DU的一段连续的时域资源(例如,一个时隙)内不包括任何soft资源(例如符号)时,指示DCI可以不对对应的MT资源进行指示。For example, the indication DCI may not indicate the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU. As a specific example, when a continuous period of time domain resources (for example, one time slot) of the IAB node DU does not include any soft resources (for example, symbols), the indicating DCI may not indicate the corresponding MT resources.

可选地,指示DCI可以指示DU的hard资源所对应的MT资源,但是始终指示释放DU的hard资源所对应的MT资源。Optionally, the indication DCI may indicate the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU, but it always indicates the release of the MT resource corresponding to the hard resource of the DU.

可选地,上级节点在对指示DCI进行配置时,可以配置指示DCI的指示资源标识。指示DCI的指示资源标识可以是符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号等的任意一种或多种。其中,指示资源表示会被指示DCI所指示的MT或DU资源。Optionally, when the upper-level node configures the indicated DCI, it may configure the indicated resource identifier of the indicated DCI. The indicator resource identifier indicating the DCI may be any one or more of symbol numbers, slot numbers, subframe numbers, system frame numbers, and so on. Wherein, the indicated resource indicates the MT or DU resource indicated by the indicated DCI.

在一种可能的实现中,IAB节点根据上述指示资源的配置确定其DU资源的hard/soft类型,确定规则如上文表1和表2所示。具体地,IAB节点将指示DCI所被配置的指示资源以外的MT资源视作“Null”资源,根据复用类型(TDM,SDM或FDM)来推断DU资源的类型(hard或soft)。In a possible implementation, the IAB node determines the hard/soft type of its DU resource according to the configuration of the indicated resource, and the determination rules are shown in Table 1 and Table 2 above. Specifically, the IAB node regards the MT resources other than the indicated resources configured for the DCI as "Null" resources, and infers the type (hard or soft) of the DU resource according to the multiplexing type (TDM, SDM or FDM).

可选地,当IAB节点的一个DU资源(例如一个时隙)内所有符号均为hard类型时,指示DCI的指示资源标识不会包含此DU资源或此DU资源对应的MT资源的编号。Optionally, when all symbols in one DU resource (for example, one time slot) of the IAB node are of the hard type, the indication resource identifier indicating the DCI does not include the DU resource or the number of the MT resource corresponding to the DU resource.

可选地,当IAB节点的一个MT资源(例如一个时隙)内所有符号均为不可用符号时,指示DCI的指示资源标识不会包含此MT资源的编号(例如不包含此时隙编号)。Optionally, when all symbols in one MT resource (for example, a time slot) of the IAB node are unavailable symbols, the indication resource identifier indicating the DCI does not include the number of the MT resource (for example, the number of the time slot is not included) .

可选地,指示区域内的部分DU的soft资源所对应的MT资源可以不被指示DCI所指示。也就是说,指示DCI的指示资源标识可以不包括这部分DU的soft资源所对应的MT资源的编号。此时,IAB节点的DU可以使用这部分DU的soft资源。在一种可能的实现中,IAB节点的DU仅可使用这部分资源进行动态传输,而不能配置周期或半持续信号的传输。Optionally, the MT resources corresponding to the soft resources of some DUs in the indication area may not be indicated by the indication DCI. In other words, the indicator resource identifier indicating the DCI may not include the number of the MT resource corresponding to the soft resource of this part of the DU. At this time, the DU of the IAB node can use the soft resources of this part of the DU. In a possible implementation, the DU of the IAB node can only use this part of the resources for dynamic transmission, and cannot configure the transmission of periodic or semi-persistent signals.

下面结合图8对本申请的两个重要概念动态资源和固定资源做详细说明。The two important concepts of this application, dynamic resources and fixed resources, are described in detail below in conjunction with FIG. 8.

参见前文的描述,IAB节点的DU的资源包括hard资源和soft资源。其中,上级节点可以向IAB节点指示soft资源中的部分或全部soft资源的可用状态。在该基础上,对于指示区域内这部分被指示(例如通过显式指示或者隐式指示)的soft资源的集合(资源的可用状态可能发生改变)可以被称为动态资源。而对于指示区域内的hard资源以及没有被指示的soft资源的集合(资源的可用状态不会发生改变)可以被称为固定资源。Refer to the foregoing description, the DU resources of the IAB node include hard resources and soft resources. Among them, the upper-level node may indicate the available status of some or all of the soft resources to the IAB node. On this basis, the set of soft resources that are indicated (for example, through explicit indication or implicit indication) in this part of the indication area (the available state of the resource may change) can be called a dynamic resource. The collection of hard resources in the indicated area and soft resources that are not indicated (the available state of the resources will not change) can be called fixed resources.

由此可知,如果上级节点对IAB节点的全部soft资源进行指示,则IAB节点的固定资源仅包括hard资源。如果上级节点仅对IAB节点的一部分soft资源的可用状态进行指示,则IAB节点的固定资源包括全部的hard资源以及不会被上级节点指示的soft资源。应理解,上级节点对IAB节点的全部soft资源进行指示可以是显式指示,也可以是隐式指示,具体的指示方式本申请不做约束,隐式指示如前所述,不再赘述。It can be seen that if the superior node instructs all soft resources of the IAB node, the fixed resources of the IAB node only include hard resources. If the upper-level node only indicates the available status of a part of the soft resources of the IAB node, the fixed resources of the IAB node include all hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated by the upper-level node. It should be understood that the indication of all soft resources of the IAB node by the upper-level node may be an explicit indication or an implicit indication. The specific indication method is not restricted in this application, and the implicit indication is as described above and will not be repeated.

图8是IAB节点的资源配置的另一例的示意图。在图8中,IAB节点的MT在第0 时隙上接收指示DCI,指示DCI的指示区域的起始位置为第1时隙,结束位置为第9时隙,因此该指示区域的持续时间为9个时隙。此外,由于指示DCI所在的时域资源的结束位置与起始位置的间隔为0,因此指示时延也为0个时隙。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of another example of resource configuration of an IAB node. In Figure 8, the MT of the IAB node receives the indication DCI in the 0th time slot. The start position of the indication area indicating the DCI is the first time slot and the end position is the 9th time slot. Therefore, the duration of the indication area is 9 time slots. In addition, since the interval between the end position and the start position of the time domain resource indicating the DCI is 0, the indicating delay is also 0 time slots.

可选地,图中的时隙编号也可以是符号编号、子帧编号、系统帧号等其他指示资源标识,本申请对此并不限定。Optionally, the time slot number in the figure may also be a symbol number, a subframe number, a system frame number, and other indicator resource identifiers, which are not limited in this application.

在该指示区域内,第2、3、4、5、9时隙为DU的soft资源,第1、6、7、8时隙为DU的hard资源,也就是说,在该指示区域内共包含5个soft资源,4个hard资源。In the indicator area, the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots are the soft resources of the DU, and the first, sixth, seventh, and eighth time slots are the hard resources of the DU, that is, there are a total of Contains 5 soft resources and 4 hard resources.

例如,上级节点的指示DCI可以对全部的soft资源的可用性进行指示(即对第2、3、4、5、9时隙均进行指示),则IAB节点的动态资源包括第2、3、4、5、9时隙,IAB节点的固定资源包括第1、6、7、8时隙。For example, the DCI indicated by the superior node can indicate the availability of all soft resources (that is, indicate the second, third, fourth, fifth, and ninth time slots), and the dynamic resources of the IAB node include the second, third, and fourth time slots. , 5, and 9 time slots, the fixed resources of the IAB node include the 1, 6, 7, and 8 time slots.

再例如,上级节点的指示DCI可以仅对部分的soft资源的可用性进行指示(例如图8中的第2、4、5时隙),则IAB节点的动态资源包括第2、4、5时隙,IAB节点的固定资源包括1、6、7、8时隙以及不会被上级节点指示的第3、9时隙。For another example, the instruction DCI of the superior node may only indicate the availability of part of the soft resources (for example, the second, fourth, and fifth time slots in Figure 8), and the dynamic resources of the IAB node include the second, fourth, and fifth time slots , The fixed resources of the IAB node include 1, 6, 7, and 8 time slots and the 3rd and 9th time slots that will not be indicated by the superior node.

下面结合附图,继续介绍本申请的指示DCI配置的相关内容。In the following, in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, continue to introduce the relevant content of the DCI configuration instruction of this application.

图9示出了指示DCI的指示区域的另一个示例。FIG. 9 shows another example of an indication area indicating DCI.

在图9中,考虑多个指示DCI所指示的指示区域出现重叠的情况。其中,共有三个指示区域,分别为指示区域#0,指示区域#1和指示区域#2,指示区域#0为某个在指示区域#0之前未在图9中示出的指示DCI的指示区域。指示区域#1和指示区域#2分别为指示DCI#1和指示DCI#2的指示区域。指示区域#1和指示区域#2存在重叠区域。In FIG. 9, consider the case where the indication areas indicated by multiple indication DCI overlap. Among them, there are three indication areas, namely indication area #0, indication area #1 and indication area #2. Indication area #0 is an indication of DCI that is not shown in Figure 9 before indication area #0. area. Indication area #1 and indication area #2 are indication areas indicating DCI#1 and DCI#2, respectively. There is an overlapping area between the indication area #1 and the indication area #2.

对于重叠区域内的动态资源(例如,图9中既被指示DCI#1指示,又被指示DCI#2指示的资源),通信协议可进行额外的限制,例如,通信协议可以按照以下任意一种方式进行规定:For dynamic resources in the overlapping area (for example, the resources indicated by both DCI#1 and DCI#2 in Figure 9), the communication protocol can be subject to additional restrictions. For example, the communication protocol can be in accordance with any of the following Way to stipulate:

(1)协议可以规定多个指示DCI指示的结果应当相同。(1) The protocol may stipulate that the results of multiple indication DCI indications should be the same.

例如,多个指示DCI可以同时指示该动态资源可用,或者同时指示该动态资源不可用。作为一个更具体的示例,在图9中,指示DCI#1和指示DCI#2可以通过隐式的方式同时指示重叠区域内的第一动态资源为可用,或者同时指示第一动态资源不可用。For example, multiple indication DCIs may indicate that the dynamic resource is available at the same time or indicate that the dynamic resource is not available at the same time. As a more specific example, in FIG. 9, the indication DCI#1 and the indication DCI#2 may simultaneously indicate that the first dynamic resource in the overlapping area is available or that the first dynamic resource is unavailable at the same time in an implicit manner.

(2)对于多个指示DCI指示的结果不相同的情况,协议可以规定后续(或者说,在时域上靠后)的指示能够覆盖(override)之前指示的结果。(2) In the case where the results of multiple indications of the DCI indication are not the same, the protocol may specify that subsequent (or later in the time domain) indication can override the result of the previous indication.

具体地,当多个指示DCI指示某个动态资源可用或者不可用的结果不同时,协议可以规定时域上位置在后的指示DCI的指示结果覆盖时域位置在前的指示DCI的指示结果。例如,在图9中,指示DCI#1和指示DCI#2可以同时指示重叠区域内的第一动态资源,并且指示DCI#1和指示DCI#2对该第一动态资源的指示的结果不同,此时,IAB节点可以将在时域上靠后的指示DCI#2的指示结果,作为确定该第一动态资源的可用状态的依据。Specifically, when multiple indicating DCIs have different results indicating that a certain dynamic resource is available or unavailable, the protocol may specify that the indicating result of the DCI that is located later in the time domain covers the indicating result of the DCI that is the first in the time domain. For example, in FIG. 9, the indication DCI#1 and the indication DCI#2 can indicate the first dynamic resource in the overlapping area at the same time, and the indication DCI#1 and the indication DCI#2 have different results for indicating the first dynamic resource. At this time, the IAB node may use the indication result indicating DCI#2 that is later in the time domain as a basis for determining the available status of the first dynamic resource.

此外,对于上述覆盖指示的方法,协议还可以进行额外的限定,例如,后续的指示DCI仅可以将之前指示DCI指示为DU不可用的资源指示为DU可用,而不能将之前指示DU可用的资源指示为DU不可用。In addition, for the above coverage indication method, the protocol may also make additional restrictions. For example, the subsequent indication DCI can only indicate that the resource previously indicated by the DCI indicated as DU unavailable is indicated as DU available, but cannot indicate the resource previously indicated as DU available. Indicates that DU is not available.

例如,若指示DCI#1指示第一动态资源为不可用,则在后的指示DCI#2可以指示该第一动态资源为可用。For example, if the indication DCI#1 indicates that the first dynamic resource is unavailable, the subsequent indication DCI#2 may indicate that the first dynamic resource is available.

再例如,若指示DCI#1指示第一动态资源为可用,则在后的指示DCI#2不应指示该第一动态资源为不可用。For another example, if the indication DCI#1 indicates that the first dynamic resource is available, the subsequent indication DCI#2 should not indicate that the first dynamic resource is unavailable.

换句话说,对于隐式指示,后续的指示DCI仅可以释放之前指示DCI未释放的资源(该资源实际为动态资源在时域上对应的MT资源),而不能将之前指示DCI释放的MT资源再次指示为不释放。In other words, for implicit indications, subsequent DCI indications can only release resources that were not released by DCI previously indicated (this resource is actually the MT resource corresponding to the dynamic resource in the time domain), but cannot release the MT resources previously indicated DCI. Instructed again not to release.

在另一种可能的实现中,IAB节点的MT可用资源集合为多个指示DCI所指示的MT可用资源集合的并集。例如,在一个指示范围内,DCI#1指示第一时隙的MT资源为不释放(可用),DCI#2指示第二时隙的MT资源为不释放(可用)。则最终的可用MT资源集合为第一和第二时隙。IAB节点应根据此并集推断其DU soft资源的可用性。In another possible implementation, the MT available resource set of the IAB node is the union of the MT available resource sets indicated by the multiple indicator DCI. For example, within an indication range, DCI#1 indicates that the MT resource of the first time slot is not released (available), and DCI#2 indicates that the MT resource of the second time slot is not released (available). Then the final set of available MT resources is the first and second time slots. The IAB node should infer the availability of its DU soft resources based on this union.

图10示出了指示DCI的指示区域的另一个示例。FIG. 10 shows another example of an indication area indicating DCI.

在图10中,指示DCI#1的指示区域上包含第二动态资源,IAB节点通过该第二动态资源对应的MT资源上从上级节点接收指示DCI#2(即该指示区域内包含另一个指示DCI的资源),通信协议可以规定该第二动态资源对应的MT资源始终可用,对于TDM场景,即可以将该第二动态资源配置为DU的不可用(Null)。In Figure 10, the indication area indicating DCI#1 contains the second dynamic resource, and the IAB node receives the indication DCI#2 from the upper node through the MT resource corresponding to the second dynamic resource (that is, the indication area contains another indication DCI resources), the communication protocol can stipulate that the MT resource corresponding to the second dynamic resource is always available. For TDM scenarios, the second dynamic resource can be configured as the DU's Null.

可选地,也可以由上级节点或donor节点通过半静态信令(例如,RRC信令)配置、或者也可以由上级节点通过动态信令(例如,MAC CE或者DCI)动态指示该第二动态资源对应的MT资源始终可用(即配置或者指示该第二动态资源为始终不可用)。Optionally, it may also be configured by an upper-level node or donor node through semi-static signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be dynamically indicated by an upper-level node through dynamic signaling (for example, MAC CE or DCI). The MT resource corresponding to the resource is always available (that is, the second dynamic resource is configured or indicated as always unavailable).

或者,协议可以规定,指示DCI所在的资源(具体地,指MT资源)始终不会被另一个指示DCI指示为不可用(或者说被释放),即,指示DCI所在的MT资源对应的动态资源始终不会被另一个指示DCI指示为可用。Alternatively, the protocol may specify that the resource (specifically, MT resource) where the DCI is indicated will never be indicated as unavailable (or released) by another DCI, that is, the dynamic resource corresponding to the MT resource where the DCI is indicated It will never be indicated as available by another indication DCI.

或者,无论指示DCI的结果如何,IAB节点的MT始终检测另一个指示DCI所对应的搜索空间。Or, regardless of the result of indicating the DCI, the MT of the IAB node always detects the search space corresponding to another indicating DCI.

可选地,对于多个指示DCI指示一个共同的指示区域的情况(例如图7中所示实施例),协议可以规定,该多个指示DCI中的至少一个所在的资源(具体地,指MT资源)始终不会被另一个指示DCI指示为不可用(或者说被释放),即,至少一个指示DCI所在的MT资源对应的动态资源始终不会被另一个指示DCI指示为可用。Optionally, for a situation where multiple indicator DCIs indicate a common indicator area (for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 7), the protocol may specify that the resource where at least one of the multiple indicator DCIs is located (specifically, refers to MT Resource) will never be indicated as unavailable (or released) by another indication DCI, that is, at least one dynamic resource corresponding to the MT resource where the indication DCI is located will never be indicated as available by another indication DCI.

在一种可能的实施方式中,指示DCI的位置(例如,由搜索空间集合配置决定)和其对应的指示区域的信息(指示区域起始时间信息,持续时间信息,结束时间信息中的至少两个,其中,部分信息可能是隐式得到的)可以由不同的信令(例如不同的RRC)配置得到,此时,IAB节点需要确定指示DCI和指示区域的关联关系,即确定每一个指示DCI所指示的指示区域,或确定一个指示区域由哪些指示DCI所指示。此时,可以通过如下方式确定:In a possible implementation manner, the location of the indication DCI (for example, determined by the search space set configuration) and its corresponding indication area information (at least two of the indication area start time information, duration information, and end time information) Among them, some of the information may be obtained implicitly) can be configured by different signaling (such as different RRC). At this time, the IAB node needs to determine the association relationship between the indicated DCI and the indicated area, that is, determine each indicated DCI The indicated indication area, or determine which indication DCI indicates an indication area. At this time, it can be determined as follows:

每个指示DCI所在的时域资源与其对应的指示区域的起始时间之间的间隔(即指示时延)可以在一定的时域范围内,例如,指示时延可以在第一阈值和第二阈值之间,因此,通过该指示DCI的位置以及上述阈值信息能够确定其指示的指示区域。进一步地,若有多个满足条件的指示区域,则可以将该多个指示区域中离该指示DCI的位置最近的(或者说,起始时间最靠前的)一个确定为其要指示的指示区域。The interval between the time domain resource where each indication DCI is located and the start time of the corresponding indication area (that is, the indication delay) can be within a certain time domain. For example, the indication delay can be between the first threshold and the second threshold. Therefore, the indication area indicated by the DCI can be determined by the position of the indication DCI and the above threshold information. Further, if there are multiple indication areas that meet the conditions, the one that is closest to the position of the indication DCI (or the one with the earliest start time) among the multiple indication areas can be determined as the indication to be indicated. area.

此外,也可以通过额外的信令来指示多个指示DCI和多个指示区域的关联关系,IAB节点可以从上级节点获取该额外的信令,并且根据所述额外的信令确定每个指示DCI所对 应的指示区域。In addition, additional signaling can also be used to indicate the association relationship between multiple indicator DCIs and multiple indicator areas. The IAB node can obtain the additional signaling from the superior node, and determine each indicator DCI according to the additional signaling. The corresponding indication area.

下面介绍多跳IAB系统中指示DCI的配置。The following describes the configuration of the indicated DCI in the multi-hop IAB system.

图11示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的一例。Figure 11 shows an example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

在图11中包括三个节点,其中,第一节点可以为donor节点,或者为IAB节点,第二节点、第三节点为IAB节点,每个节点可以包括一个或者多个下级节点,并且上级节点通过指示信息(例如,指示DCI)为下级节点动态指示资源,而下级节点可以为更下级的节点进行动态资源指示。在一种可能的实现中,IAB节点可以有多个上级节点。Figure 11 includes three nodes. The first node can be a donor node or an IAB node. The second and third nodes are IAB nodes. Each node can include one or more lower-level nodes, and the upper-level node The indication information (for example, indication DCI) dynamically indicates resources for the lower-level nodes, and the lower-level nodes can perform dynamic resource indications for the lower-level nodes. In a possible implementation, the IAB node may have multiple upper-level nodes.

具体地,以第二节点为例,第二节点(的MT)接收第一节点(的DU)发送的指示DCI(图11中条形框C表示指示DCI所在的时域资源),第二节点的MT会根据搜索空间集合的配置在特定的时域位置检测该指示DCI,在收到指示DCI以后,第二节点会根据接收到的该指示DCI的内容生成新的指示DCI,并且将新的指示DCI向第三节点进行发送。应理解,第二节点可能包括多个下级节点,因此第二节点可能发送多个该新的指示DCI,并且多个新的指示DCI的内容可以相同,也可以不同。Specifically, taking the second node as an example, the second node (MT) receives the indication DCI sent by the first node (DU) (bar C in FIG. 11 indicates the time domain resource where the DCI is located), and the second node MT will detect the indicated DCI at a specific time domain position according to the configuration of the search space set. After receiving the indicated DCI, the second node will generate a new indicated DCI according to the content of the received indicated DCI, and will Instruct the DCI to send to the third node. It should be understood that the second node may include multiple lower-level nodes, so the second node may send multiple new indicating DCIs, and the content of the multiple new indicating DCIs may be the same or different.

为了便于表述以及方便理解,在本申请中,将每个节点(的MT)从上级节点接收到的指示DCI称作第一指示DCI,并且将其发送给下级节点的指示DCI称作第二指示DCI。For ease of presentation and understanding, in this application, the indication DCI received by each node (MT) from the upper node is called the first indication DCI, and the indication DCI sent to the lower node is called the second indication. DCI.

并且,将第一指示DCI指示的区域称为第一指示区域,将第二指示DCI指示的区域称为第二指示区域。In addition, the area indicated by the first indication DCI is referred to as the first indication area, and the area indicated by the second indication DCI is referred to as the second indication area.

当第三节点为第二节点的下级节点时,第三节点(的MT)所接收的第一指示DCI是第二节点发送的第二指示DCI。When the third node is a subordinate node of the second node, the first indication DCI received by the third node (MT) is the second indication DCI sent by the second node.

在一种可能的实现中,当第三节点被配置了第一指示DCI的监测,且此DCI由第二节点发送时,第二节点与第三节点之间的半静态信号可以被配置在第二节点的动态资源上,所述半静态信号包括CSI-RS,SRS等参考信号,半静态PDSCH,PUSCH,即PUCCH等物理信道。在这种情况下,当第二节点的被配置了半静态信号的动态资源被上级节点指示为不可用时,第二节点可通过第二指示DCI关闭与第三节点在此动态资源上的通信。In a possible implementation, when the third node is configured to monitor the first indication DCI, and this DCI is sent by the second node, the semi-static signal between the second node and the third node may be configured in the first On the dynamic resources of the two nodes, the semi-static signals include reference signals such as CSI-RS and SRS, and semi-static PDSCH, PUSCH, that is, physical channels such as PUCCH. In this case, when the dynamic resource configured with the semi-static signal of the second node is indicated as unavailable by the superior node, the second node may close the communication with the third node on the dynamic resource through the second instruction DCI.

作为一个实施例,当一个第二指示区域内的部分待指示资源与一个或多个第一指示区域内的部分待指示资源在时域上重叠时,称对应的一个或多个第二指示DCI依赖于对应的一个或多个第一指示DCI,或者称此一个或多个第一指示DCI与此一个与多个第二指示DCI具有关联关系。As an embodiment, when part of the resources to be indicated in a second indication area overlaps with part of the resources to be indicated in one or more first indication areas in the time domain, it is said that the corresponding one or more second indication DCIs Depend on the corresponding one or more first indication DCI, or call this one or more first indication DCI and this one or more second indication DCI have an association relationship.

在一种可能的实现中,采用如下方式定义具有关联关系的第一指示DCI和第二指示DCI。In a possible implementation, the following manner is used to define the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI having an association relationship.

在满足前述第一指示DCI和第二指示DCI在时域上重叠指示的要求的同时,第一指示区域和第二指示区域还应满足如下要求:While satisfying the aforementioned requirement of overlapping indication of the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI in the time domain, the first indication area and the second indication area should also meet the following requirements:

(1)所述第二指示区域的起始位置不提前于所述第一指示区域;(1) The starting position of the second indication area is not ahead of the first indication area;

(2)所述第二指示区域为第一个满足条件(1)的第二指示区域。(2) The second indication area is the first second indication area that meets the condition (1).

当所述第一指示区域和第二指示区域满足以上两个条件时,称两者是具有关联关系的指示区域。When the first indication area and the second indication area meet the above two conditions, they are said to be indication areas having an association relationship.

应注意,在本申请中,讨论第一指示DCI与第二指示DCI之间的关系时,一般讨论的是具有关联关系的第一指示DCI与第二指示DCI。It should be noted that in this application, when discussing the relationship between the first indicator DCI and the second indicator DCI, the first indicator DCI and the second indicator DCI having an association relationship are generally discussed.

类似的,在本申请中,讨论第一指示区域与第二指示区域之间的关系时,一般讨论的 是具有关联关系的第一指示区域和第二指示区域。Similarly, in the present application, when discussing the relationship between the first indicator area and the second indicator area, the first indicator area and the second indicator area having an associated relationship are generally discussed.

应理解,当一个第二指示DCI与一个第一指示DCI具有关联关系时,第二指示DCI对部分资源的指示可能需要根据第一指示DCI确定。It should be understood that when a second indication DCI has an association relationship with a first indication DCI, the indication of the second indication DCI to a part of the resources may need to be determined according to the first indication DCI.

可以理解的是,IAB节点从接收第一指示DCI到发送第二指示DCI需要一定的处理时延,处理时延包括了MT对第一指示DCI的检测与译码时延,MT与DU的交互与处理时延,以及DU发送第二指示DCI的准备时间等。在本申请中,将IAB节点从上级节点接收第一指示DCI到向下级节点发送第二指示DCI所需要的处理时延称为第一时延。It is understandable that the IAB node needs a certain processing delay from receiving the first indication DCI to sending the second indication DCI. The processing delay includes the detection and decoding delay of the first indication DCI by the MT, and the interaction between the MT and the DU. And processing time delay, and the preparation time for the DU to send the second indication DCI, etc. In this application, the processing delay required for the IAB node to receive the first indication DCI from the superior node to send the second indication DCI to the subordinate node is called the first delay.

具体地,该第一时延可以由通信协议来定义,也可以由IAB节点上报。Specifically, the first time delay may be defined by a communication protocol, or may be reported by the IAB node.

作为一个实施例,第一时延可以用一定子载波间隔下的时隙数目和/或符号数目来表示。例如。在子载波间隔为120KHz时,第一时延最大为28个符号。As an embodiment, the first time delay may be represented by the number of time slots and/or the number of symbols under a certain subcarrier interval. E.g. When the sub-carrier spacing is 120KHz, the first time delay is 28 symbols at most.

可选的,在配置指示DCI时,具有关联关系的第一指示DCI与第二指示DCI之间的间隔应大于等于第一时延。例如,如图11所示,第一指示DCI与第二指示DCI之间的间隔可以等于第一时延,也即该间隔可以为处理时延。Optionally, when the indicating DCI is configured, the interval between the first indicating DCI and the second indicating DCI having an association relationship should be greater than or equal to the first time delay. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the interval between the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI may be equal to the first delay, that is, the interval may be the processing delay.

此外,对于多个指示DCI对应同一个指示区域的情况,可得到具有关联关系的多个第一指示DCI和多个第二指示DCI。此时,可以配置最后一个第一指示DCI与第一个第二指示DCI之间的间隔应大于等于第一时延。或者,可以配置至少一个第一指示DCI和一个第二指示DCI之间的间隔大于等于第一时延。In addition, for the case where multiple indicator DCIs correspond to the same indicator area, multiple first indicator DCIs and multiple second indicator DCIs having an association relationship can be obtained. At this time, it can be configured that the interval between the last first indication DCI and the first second indication DCI should be greater than or equal to the first delay. Alternatively, the interval between at least one first indication DCI and one second indication DCI may be configured to be greater than or equal to the first time delay.

应理解,上述设定仅仅为了便于表述以及方便理解,而非对本申请技术方案的限定,本领域技术人员应当知晓,上述相关信息还能够以其他形式出现。It should be understood that the above setting is only for ease of expression and ease of understanding, and is not a limitation to the technical solution of the present application. Those skilled in the art should know that the above related information can also appear in other forms.

由于每个节点的第二指示DCI根据第一指示DCI进行确定,因此,通常第二指示DCI所指示的第二指示区域的结束时间与第一指示DCI所指示的第一指示区域的结束时间在时域上完全重合,可选地,第二指示区域和第一指示区域的起始时间在时域上也可能相重合。Since the second indication DCI of each node is determined according to the first indication DCI, usually the end time of the second indication area indicated by the second indication DCI and the end time of the first indication area indicated by the first indication DCI are within The time domain completely overlaps. Optionally, the start time of the second indication area and the first indication area may also overlap in the time domain.

为了满足上述条件,应当首先确定对最下级节点的指示范围。具体地,在图11中,应当首先确定第三节点的第一指示DCI(即第二节点的第二指示DCI)的指示范围,而后确定第二节点的第一指示DCI(即第一节点的第二指示DCI)的指示范围。在图11中,由于第一节点为最上级节点或者donor节点,因此不存在第一指示DCI,而第三节点为最下级节点,因此不存在第二指示DCI。In order to meet the above conditions, the indication range for the lowest-level node should be determined first. Specifically, in Figure 11, the indication range of the first indication DCI of the third node (that is, the second indication DCI of the second node) should be determined first, and then the first indication DCI of the second node (that is, the first node’s The second indicates the indication range of DCI). In FIG. 11, since the first node is the uppermost node or the donor node, there is no first indication DCI, and the third node is the lowermost node, so there is no second indication DCI.

此外,为了节省指示DCI的开销,在图11中指示DCI的指示范围等于指示DCI的周期。In addition, in order to save the overhead of indicating DCI, the indicating range of indicating DCI in FIG. 11 is equal to the period of indicating DCI.

然而,在上述确定指示范围的过程中,将会出现延迟传递的问题。具体地,在图11中,第一指示DCI对应的指示时延为指示时延#1,第二指示DCI对应的指示时延为指示时延#2,在满足前述“第一指示区域的结束时间和第二指示区域的结束时间在时域上完全重合”的条件下,此时,指示时延#1的长度将等于指示时延#2加上第二指示DCI所在的时域资源和处理时延的长度。However, in the above process of determining the indication range, there will be a problem of delayed delivery. Specifically, in FIG. 11, the indication delay corresponding to the first indication DCI is indication delay #1, and the indication delay corresponding to the second indication DCI is indication delay #2. Under the condition that the time and the end time of the second indication area completely coincide in the time domain, the length of indication delay #1 will be equal to indication delay #2 plus the time domain resources and processing where the second indication DCI is located. The length of the delay.

更进一步地,图11中只示出了三个IAB节点,实际上在多跳IAB系统中可能存在更多级的IAB节点(例如,可能还包括第四节点、第五节点等等),此时,由于延迟积累,上游节点的第一指示DCI可能具有更大的指示时延,由此造成对上游节点(例如第二节点)的动态指示不够及时,使得动态指示的效果不理想。Furthermore, only three IAB nodes are shown in FIG. 11. In fact, there may be more levels of IAB nodes in a multi-hop IAB system (for example, it may also include a fourth node, a fifth node, etc.). At this time, due to delay accumulation, the first indication DCI of the upstream node may have a larger indication delay, which causes the dynamic indication to the upstream node (for example, the second node) to be not timely enough, making the effect of the dynamic indication unsatisfactory.

此外,还存在另外一个问题,当有新的下级节点加入时,所有的节点可能都需要重新配置指示DCI的指示范围和/或指示时延。In addition, there is another problem. When a new lower-level node joins, all nodes may need to reconfigure the indication range and/or indication delay of the indication DCI.

为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的另一例,不会出现延迟传递等问题。In order to solve the foregoing problem, the embodiment of the present application provides another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system, which does not cause problems such as delayed delivery.

图12示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的另一例。Fig. 12 shows another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

在图12中,第二节点可以周期性的接收第一节点发送的第一指示DCI,并且周期性的向第三节点发送第二指示DCI,第二节点接收第一指示DCI和发送第二指示DCI的周期可以相同。In FIG. 12, the second node may periodically receive the first indication DCI sent by the first node, and periodically send the second indication DCI to the third node, and the second node may receive the first indication DCI and send the second indication. The period of DCI can be the same.

在图12中,第一指示DCI和第二指示DCI对应的指示时延#1和指示时延#2相等,并且第一指示区域和第二指示区域的持续时间也相同。In FIG. 12, the indication delay #1 and the indication delay #2 corresponding to the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI are equal, and the duration of the first indication area and the second indication area are also the same.

但应注意,指示时延#1和指示时延#2可以被独立配置或获取,并且指示时延#1和指示时延#2可以有不同的取值。此外,第一指示区域和第二指示区域也可以被独立配置或获取,并且两者可以有不同的取值。However, it should be noted that the indicated time delay #1 and the indicated time delay #2 can be independently configured or acquired, and the indicated time delay #1 and the indicated time delay #2 may have different values. In addition, the first indication area and the second indication area can also be independently configured or acquired, and the two can have different values.

作为一种可能的实现方式,第一指示DCI和第二指示DCI对应的指示时延#1和指示时延#2的时长均大于或者等于第一时延。在图12中,为了节省指示DCI的开销,指示DCI的指示范围等于指示DCI的周期。具体地,第一指示DCI的第一指示区域的开始时间与第二指示DCI所在时域资源的开始时间相重合,并且一直延续到下一周期第一指示DCI的指示区域的开始时间,或者说,一直延续到下一周期第二指示DCI所在时域资源的开始时间。但应注意,本申请不对指示DCI的指示范围与指示DCI的周期的关系加以限制。As a possible implementation manner, the durations of the indication delay #1 and the indication delay #2 corresponding to the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI are both greater than or equal to the first delay. In FIG. 12, in order to save the overhead of indicating DCI, the indicating range of indicating DCI is equal to the period of indicating DCI. Specifically, the start time of the first indication area of the first indication DCI coincides with the start time of the time domain resource where the second indication DCI is located, and continues until the start time of the first indication area of the DCI in the next cycle, or , Continues until the start time of the time domain resource where the DCI is located at the second indication of the next cycle. However, it should be noted that this application does not limit the relationship between the indication range of the DCI and the cycle of the DCI.

图12所示的实施例由于第一指示DCI和第二指示DCI的指示时延是被独立配置的,即指示时延#1取值不依赖于指示时延#2的取值,因此不会出现延迟传递的问题。然而,图12中第一指示区域和第二指示区域在时域上并不完全重叠。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, since the indication delays of the first indication DCI and the second indication DCI are independently configured, that is, the value of the indication delay #1 does not depend on the value of the indication delay #2, so it does not There is a problem of delayed delivery. However, the first indication area and the second indication area in FIG. 12 do not completely overlap in the time domain.

具体地,根据附图12可知,第二指示区域的结束时间在第一指示区域的结束时间之后。此时,可以将第二指示区域分成两部分,如图12所示,所述两部分分别为S区域和X区域。其中,S区域的起始时间也即第二指示区域的起始时间,S区域的结束时间与第一指示区域的结束时间在时域上重合。X区域的起始时间与S区域的结束时间重合(或者说,X区域的起始时间与第一指示区域的结束时间在时域上重合),X区域的结束时间也即第二指示区域的结束时间。Specifically, according to FIG. 12, it can be seen that the end time of the second indication area is after the end time of the first indication area. At this time, the second indication area can be divided into two parts, as shown in FIG. 12, the two parts are respectively an S area and an X area. The start time of the S area is also the start time of the second indication area, and the end time of the S area overlaps with the end time of the first indication area in the time domain. The start time of the X area coincides with the end time of the S area (or the start time of the X area coincides with the end time of the first indicator area in the time domain), and the end time of the X area is also the end time of the second indicator area. End Time.

第二节点在向下级节点进行资源指示时,由于第二指示区域的结束时间位于第一指示区域的结束时间之后,这也意味着位于第一指示区域的结束时间之后的时域区域(即X区域),第一节点还未向第二节点进行资源指示,而第二节点需要向第三节点进行资源指示。When the second node indicates the resource to the subordinate node, since the end time of the second indicator area is after the end time of the first indicator area, this also means that the time domain area (that is, X) is located after the end time of the first indicator area. Area), the first node has not yet performed a resource indication to the second node, and the second node needs to perform a resource indication to the third node.

第二节点根据从第一节点接收到的第一指示DCI,只能确定第二指示区域的S区域上的动态资源的可用状态,而无法知道X区域上的动态资源的可用状态。如果第二节点在从第一节点获取X区域的MT资源配置之前决定其DU的资源配置,并向第三节点进行资源指示,可能会出现与第一节点后续对该X区域的资源指示冲突的问题。According to the first indication DCI received from the first node, the second node can only determine the available status of the dynamic resources on the S area of the second indication area, but cannot know the available status of the dynamic resources on the X area. If the second node decides the resource configuration of its DU before obtaining the MT resource configuration of the X area from the first node, and indicates the resource to the third node, there may be conflicts with the first node's subsequent resource indication for the X area problem.

下面对X区域的资源配置以及资源指示冲突的产生原因做进一步说明。The resource configuration of the X area and the cause of resource indication conflict will be further explained below.

具体地,考虑隐式指示的情况,在X区域上可能包含K个第三节点的MT资源需要由第二节点的第二指示DCI进行指示,其中,K为非负整数。Specifically, considering the situation of implicit indication, the MT resources of the K third nodes in the X area need to be indicated by the second indication DCI of the second node, where K is a non-negative integer.

该K个MT资源对应于第三节点的K个DU资源,所对应的DU资源可包含动态资源,固定资源和不可用资源。其中,第三节点的动态资源的可用性需要由第二节点发送的第二指示DCI确定。The K MT resources correspond to the K DU resources of the third node, and the corresponding DU resources may include dynamic resources, fixed resources, and unavailable resources. Wherein, the availability of the dynamic resource of the third node needs to be determined by the second indication DCI sent by the second node.

应理解,该K个MT资源也对应于第二节点的K个DU资源,所对应DU资源可包含动态资源,固定资源和不可用资源。其中,第二节点动态资源的可用性需要由第二节点接收的第一指示DCI确定。It should be understood that the K MT resources also correspond to the K DU resources of the second node, and the corresponding DU resources may include dynamic resources, fixed resources, and unavailable resources. Wherein, the availability of dynamic resources of the second node needs to be determined by the first indication DCI received by the second node.

应理解,K值可以为0,即在X区域第三节点不存在被指示的MT资源。It should be understood that the K value may be 0, that is, the indicated MT resource does not exist in the third node in the X area.

图13示出了X区域资源配置的示意图。图13假设了TDM的场景。Figure 13 shows a schematic diagram of the resource configuration of the X area. Figure 13 assumes a TDM scenario.

在图13中,第三节点的DU共包括4个soft资源,其中,第1、2、5时隙对应的soft资源的可用状态被第二节点指示,也就是说,在X区域内,共包括三个动态资源(即K值为3),即在X区域共包括三个第三节点的MT资源的可用性需要由第二节点发送的第二指示DCI所指示。此外,在X区域还包括三个固定资源,分别为第0、4时隙对应的hard资源,以及第3时隙未被指示的soft资源。In Figure 13, the DU of the third node includes a total of 4 soft resources. Among them, the available status of the soft resources corresponding to the first, second, and fifth time slots is indicated by the second node, that is, in the X area, a total of It includes three dynamic resources (that is, the K value is 3), that is, the availability of the MT resources including three third nodes in the X area needs to be indicated by the second indication DCI sent by the second node. In addition, the X area also includes three fixed resources, which are hard resources corresponding to time slots 0 and 4, and soft resources that are not indicated in time slot 3.

由于在X区域,第二节点先对第三节点进行资源指示,而此时第一节点并不知道第二节点的指示内容,由此可能会出现与第一节点后续对X区域的资源指示冲突的问题。例如,第二节点先指示了第三节点第2时隙对应的MT资源为不释放,则第三节点的DU将不会在第2时隙与下级节点进行通信,而第三节点的MT可能在第2时隙向第二节点DU发送信号或接收第二节点DU发送的信号,之后如果第一节点指示了第二节点第2时隙对应的MT资源也为不释放,在TDM假设下,第二节点的DU将无法在第2时隙与第三节点进行通信,即出现了资源指示冲突。所述资源指示冲突可能导致以下后果:(1)第三节点MT与第二节点DU之间通信的失败;(2)第三节点MT发送的信号可产生不必要的干扰;(3)第三节点的DU资源被浪费。Because in area X, the second node first indicates the resources of the third node, and the first node does not know the content of the instructions of the second node at this time, so there may be conflicts with the first node's subsequent resource instructions to the X area The problem. For example, if the second node first indicates that the MT resource corresponding to the second time slot of the third node is not to be released, the DU of the third node will not communicate with the subordinate node in the second time slot, and the MT of the third node may Send a signal to the second node DU in the second time slot or receive a signal sent by the second node DU, and then if the first node instructs the second node that the MT resource corresponding to the second time slot is not released, under the TDM assumption, The DU of the second node cannot communicate with the third node in the second time slot, that is, a resource indication conflict occurs. The resource indication conflict may cause the following consequences: (1) the communication failure between the third node MT and the second node DU; (2) the signal sent by the third node MT may cause unnecessary interference; (3) third The DU resources of the node are wasted.

为此,本申请提供一种指示资源的方法200,能够避免上述资源指示冲突的产生。To this end, the present application provides a method 200 for indicating resources, which can avoid the occurrence of the foregoing resource indication conflicts.

具体地,图14是本申请一种指示资源的方法200的示意性流程图。该方法200包括步骤210-240,下面将结合图12-15,对方法来200进行说明。Specifically, FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for indicating resources according to the present application. The method 200 includes steps 210-240. The method 200 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 12-15.

在方法200中,第一节点为第二节点的上级节点,第三节点为第二节点的下级节点,以下不再赘述。In the method 200, the first node is an upper-level node of the second node, and the third node is a lower-level node of the second node, which will not be repeated here.

在步骤210中,第二节点获取资源配置信息,资源配置信息用于指示第二节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置。In step 210, the second node obtains resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the configuration of fixed resources and dynamic resources of the second node.

具体地,参见前文的描述,第二节点的固定资源包括hard资源以及不会被上级节点(即第一节点)指示可用状态的soft资源,而第二节点的动态资源包括会被上级节点指示可用状态的soft资源。Specifically, referring to the foregoing description, the fixed resources of the second node include hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated as available by the superior node (ie, the first node), while the dynamic resources of the second node include the available resources indicated by the superior node. State soft resources.

在一种可能的实现中,第二节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置通过第二节点的MT的资源配置推断得到,即第二节点的固定资源和动态资源被隐式配置。In a possible implementation, the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node is inferred from the resource configuration of the MT of the second node, that is, the fixed resource and dynamic resource of the second node are implicitly configured.

也就是说,第二节点根据资源配置信息,能够确定第二节点的哪些soft资源会被上级节点所指示。That is, according to the resource configuration information, the second node can determine which soft resources of the second node will be indicated by the superior node.

作为一种可能的实现方式,第二节点可以从第一节点获取资源配置信息。As a possible implementation manner, the second node may obtain resource configuration information from the first node.

此外,资源配置信息还可以包括其他信息,本申请对此并不限定。例如,还可以用于指示第二节点、第三节点的MT资源和DU资源的传输方向(D/U/F),DU资源的类型 (soft/hard),DU的NULL资源的位置等,指示区域的长度等。In addition, the resource configuration information may also include other information, which is not limited in this application. For example, it can also be used to indicate the transmission direction (D/U/F) of the MT resource and DU resource of the second node and the third node, the type of DU resource (soft/hard), the location of the NULL resource of the DU, etc. The length of the area, etc.

可选的,上述资源配置信息可由donor节点生成并发送给第一节点,而后由第一节点发送给第二节点,或者由donor节点生成并发送给第二节点。Optionally, the above resource configuration information may be generated by the donor node and sent to the first node, and then sent by the first node to the second node, or generated by the donor node and sent to the second node.

需要理解的是,第二节点获取的资源配置信息的指示内容在不进行重配置的情况下应该认为是固定的。这里,资源配置信息的指示内容固定是指上级节点指示的soft资源的编号是固定的,而不应理解为每次指示的动态资源的可用状态是不变的。例如,第一节点周期发送的第一指示信息所指示的第一指示区域包括6个时隙,其中,时隙0,时隙2和时隙4对应DU的soft资源。第二节点根据从第一节点获取的第二节点的资源配置信息,可以知道时隙0,时隙2和时隙4对应的动态资源需要第一节点进行指示的时隙号。例如,第一节点在每个周期指示时隙2和时隙4对应的动态资源的可用状态,而在每个周期对时隙2和时隙4对应的动态资源的可用状态的指示结果可以不同。It should be understood that the indication content of the resource configuration information acquired by the second node should be considered fixed without reconfiguration. Here, the fixed indication content of the resource configuration information means that the number of the soft resource indicated by the upper-level node is fixed, and it should not be understood that the available state of the dynamic resource indicated each time is unchanged. For example, the first indication area indicated by the first indication information periodically sent by the first node includes 6 time slots, where time slot 0, time slot 2 and time slot 4 correspond to soft resources of the DU. According to the resource configuration information of the second node obtained from the first node, the second node can know that the dynamic resources corresponding to timeslot 0, timeslot 2 and timeslot 4 need the timeslot number indicated by the first node. For example, the first node indicates the available status of the dynamic resources corresponding to time slot 2 and time slot 4 in each cycle, and the indication results of the available status of the dynamic resources corresponding to time slot 2 and time slot 4 may be different in each cycle. .

在步骤220中,第二节点接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第二节点的第一指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态。In step 220, the second node receives the first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node.

本文中,动态资源的可用状态包括可用和不可用两种状态。In this article, the available states of dynamic resources include two states: available and unavailable.

这里,第一指示信息具体可以为上文中所述的指示DCI。为了描述上的方便,下文也将第一指示信息称为第一指示DCI。Here, the first indication information may specifically be the indication DCI described above. For the convenience of description, the first indication information is also referred to as the first indication DCI below.

具体地,第二节点接收其上级节点(即第一节点)发送的第一指示信息(即第一指示DCI),第一指示信息能够指示第一指示区域上的一个或者多个动态资源是否可用。可选地,第一指示信息可以显式指示第一指示区域上的一个或多个动态资源是否可用,也可以隐式指示,本申请对此并不限定。Specifically, the second node receives the first indication information (ie, the first indication DCI) sent by its superior node (ie, the first node), the first indication information can indicate whether one or more dynamic resources on the first indication area are available . Optionally, the first indication information may explicitly indicate whether one or more dynamic resources on the first indication area are available, or may indicate implicitly, which is not limited in this application.

这里,显式指示是指第一指示信息直接指示第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态。隐式指示是指第一指示信息指示第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态。第二节点根据第一指示信息所指示的MT的部分资源的可用状态,确定DU的动态资源的可用状态。Here, the explicit indication means that the first indication information directly indicates the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node. The implicit indication means that the first indication information indicates the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node. The second node determines the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU according to the available state of some resources of the MT indicated by the first indication information.

例如,在隐式指示的方式中,第一指示信息能够用于指示第一指示区域上的所述第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态,该MT的部分资源的全部或者一部分在时域上与第二节点的DU的动态资源相对应,第一指示信息可以通过指示是否释放MT资源,来间接指示DU的动态资源(或者说第二节点的动态资源)的可用性。For example, in an implicit indication manner, the first indication information can be used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, and all or part of the partial resources of the MT are in the time domain. The above corresponds to the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node, and the first indication information can indirectly indicate the availability of the dynamic resource of the DU (or the dynamic resource of the second node) by indicating whether to release the MT resource.

在一种可能的实现中,在隐式指示的方式中,第一指示信息能够用于指示第一指示区域上的所述第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态,该MT的部分资源的一部分在时域上与第二节点的DU的不可用资源相对应,此时,无论第一指示信息是否释放MT资源,所对应的DU不可用资源依然为不可用。In a possible implementation, in an implicit indication manner, the first indication information can be used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, A part corresponds to the unavailable resource of the DU of the second node in the time domain. At this time, regardless of whether the first indication information releases the MT resource, the corresponding DU unavailable resource is still unavailable.

在另一种可能的实现中,在隐式指示的方式中,第一指示信息能够用于指示第一指示区域上的所述第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态,该MT的部分资源中的一部分在时域上与第二节点的DU的hard资源相对应,此时,可以有两种情况:(1)无论第一指示信息是否释放这部分MT资源,所对应的DU hard资源始终可用;(2)第一指示信息对这部分MT资源的指示,始终不影响第二节点的DU hard资源的可用性,对于TDM场景或MT与DU上下行配置一致(同为下行或同为上行)的SDM场景,第一指示信息始终释放这部分MT资源。In another possible implementation, in an implicit indication manner, the first indication information can be used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, and some resources of the MT A part of MT corresponds to the hard resource of the DU of the second node in the time domain. At this time, there can be two situations: (1) Regardless of whether the first indication information releases this part of the MT resource, the corresponding DU hard resource is always Available; (2) The indication of this part of the MT resource by the first indication information will never affect the availability of the DU hard resource of the second node. For TDM scenarios or the MT and DU uplink and downlink configurations are the same (the same downlink or the same uplink) In the SDM scenario, the first indication message always releases this part of MT resources.

再例如,在显式指示的方式中,第一指示信息还可以用于指示第一指示区域上的第二 节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态。第二节点能够根据第一指示信息,确定第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态。For another example, in an explicit indication manner, the first indication information may also be used to indicate the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node on the first indication area. The second node can determine the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the first indication information.

应理解,第二节点在接收第一指示信息之前,首先需要接收第一指示信息的配置信息。It should be understood that, before receiving the first indication information, the second node first needs to receive the configuration information of the first indication information.

在一个实施例中,第一指示信息的配置信息可以包括以下信息中的至少一种:In an embodiment, the configuration information of the first indication information may include at least one of the following information:

第一指示区域的起始时间,第一指示区域的结束时间,第一指示区域的持续时间,第一指示信息所在的时域资源的结束时间和第一指示区域的起始时间之间的间隔(即指示时延)。The start time of the first indication area, the end time of the first indication area, the duration of the first indication area, the interval between the end time of the time domain resource where the first indication information is located and the start time of the first indication area (That is, indicate the time delay).

此外,第一指示信息的配置信息还可以包括:一个或多个待指示资源的资源标识。这里,待指示资源表示待指示的MT资源或DU资源;资源标识可以为符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号中的至少一种。In addition, the configuration information of the first indication information may further include: resource identifiers of one or more resources to be indicated. Here, the resource to be indicated means the MT resource or the DU resource to be indicated; the resource identifier may be at least one of a symbol number, a slot number, a subframe number, and a system frame number.

关于显式指示、隐式指示以及第一指示信息的配置信息的说明已经在前文中进行详细的描述,在此不再赘述。The description of the configuration information of the explicit indication, the implicit indication and the first indication information has been described in detail in the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.

可选地,第一指示信息还可以包括配置类型指示,配置类型指示用于指示配置信息中的资源是增量配置还是重新配置。如果是增量配置,那么第一指示信息中仅包含少量增加或减少的动态资源,从而减小信令开销。而在重新配置中,之前所有的通过第一指示信息配置的动态资源将被忽略,而完全采用配置信息中的动态资源。应理解,两种类型的配置类型指示可以交替使用,本申请不对增量配置还是重新配置的使用条件进行约束。Optionally, the first indication information may further include a configuration type indication, and the configuration type indication is used to indicate whether the resource in the configuration information is incremental configuration or reconfiguration. If it is an incremental configuration, the first indication information contains only a small amount of increased or decreased dynamic resources, thereby reducing signaling overhead. In the reconfiguration, all previous dynamic resources configured through the first indication information will be ignored, and the dynamic resources in the configuration information will be completely used. It should be understood that the two types of configuration type indications can be used interchangeably, and this application does not restrict the use conditions of incremental configuration or reconfiguration.

在步骤230中,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息。第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上第二节点和第三节点间的资源可用状态,第二指示区域包括未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源,第二指示信息指示未被第一指示信息指示的该至少一个动态资源的状态为不可用。In step 230, the second node determines second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information. The second indication information is used to indicate the resource availability status between the second node and the third node on the second indication area, the second indication area includes at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates The state of the at least one dynamic resource indicated by the first indication information is unavailable.

具体地,第二节点和第三节点之间的资源可以理解为第二节点和第三节点之间进行通信所使用的资源,例如,可以是第三节点的MT资源,或者,第二节点的DU资源。Specifically, the resource between the second node and the third node can be understood as the resource used for communication between the second node and the third node, for example, it can be the MT resource of the third node, or the resource of the second node. DU resources.

可选地,第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上第二节点和第三节点之间的资源的可用状态可以理解为第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上第三节点的MT资源的可用状态。Optionally, the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of resources between the second node and the third node in the second indication area, which can be understood as the second indication information used to indicate the MT of the third node in the second indication area The available status of the resource.

可选地,第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上第二节点和第三节点之间的资源的可用状态还可以理解为第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上第二节点的DU资源的可用状态。Optionally, the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of the resources between the second node and the third node on the second indication area, and can also be understood as the second indication information used to indicate the status of the second node on the second indication area The available status of the DU resource.

在一种可能的实现中,未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源为前述X区域内第二节点的动态资源。In a possible implementation, the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is the dynamic resource of the second node in the aforementioned X area.

参见图12,第二节点从第一节点接收到的第一指示信息用于指示第一指示区域,第二指示信息用于向第三节点指示第二指示区域。其中,第二指示区域中位于第一指示区域的结束位置之后的区域即为这里所说的X区域。换句话说,第二指示区域可以包括两部分,分别如图12中所示的S区域和X区域。其中S区域为第二指示区域和第一指示区域的重叠部分,X区域为第二指示区域在时域上位于第一指示区域的结束时间之后的部分,第一指示信息并不能对该X区域内的资源进行指示。Referring to FIG. 12, the first indication information received by the second node from the first node is used to indicate the first indication area, and the second indication information is used to indicate the second indication area to the third node. Wherein, the area located after the end position of the first indication area in the second indication area is the X area referred to here. In other words, the second indication area may include two parts, an S area and an X area as shown in FIG. 12, respectively. The S area is the overlapping part of the second indicator area and the first indicator area, and the X area is the part of the second indicator area located after the end time of the first indicator area in the time domain. The first indicator information cannot be used for the X area. The resources within.

需要理解的是,第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上的部分或全部动态资源的可用状态,也即第二指示信息既用于指示第二指示区域的S区域上的动态资源的可用状态,也 同时指示了第二指示区域的X区域上的动态资源的可用状态。It should be understood that the second indication information is used to indicate the availability status of some or all of the dynamic resources in the second indication area, that is, the second indication information is used to indicate the availability of dynamic resources in the S area of the second indication area. The status also indicates the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area of the second indication area.

其中,S区域上的动态资源的可用状态是根据第一指示信息所指示的第一指示区域的动态资源的可用状态确定的。可以理解的是,由于S区域是第一指示区域和第二指示区域的重叠部分,因此,第二节点根据第一指示信息确定第三节点在S区域上的动态资源的可用状态,再进一步向第三节点进行指示,是不会和第一指示信息指示的第二节点的第一指示区域的动态资源的可用状态冲突的。Wherein, the available state of the dynamic resource in the S area is determined according to the available state of the dynamic resource in the first indication area indicated by the first indication information. It is understandable that since the S area is the overlapping part of the first indication area and the second indication area, the second node determines the available status of the dynamic resources of the third node in the S area according to the first indication information, and then further The third node indicates that it will not conflict with the available state of the dynamic resource in the first indication area of the second node indicated by the first indication information.

而X区域由于位于第一指示区域的结束时间之后,因此,第一节点向第二节点发送的第一指示信息仅指示到第一指示区域的结束时间,对于位于第一指示区域的结束时间之后的时域资源,第一指示信息中未指示。但是第二节点在指示第三节点的动态资源的可用状态时,却需要指示位于第一指示区域的结束时间之后的X区域上的动态资源的可用状态。换句话说,在第一节点还未向第二节点指示X区域上的动态资源的可用状态时,第二节点需要提前向下级节点指示X区域上的动态资源的可用状态。如果,第二节点在不考虑第一节点对X区域的动态资源的指示的情况下,盲目向第三节点指示X区域的动态资源的可用状态,那么可能会和第一节点后续对X区域上的动态资源的指示冲突。Since the X area is located after the end time of the first indication area, the first indication information sent by the first node to the second node only indicates the end time of the first indication area. For those located after the end time of the first indication area The time domain resource is not indicated in the first indication information. However, when the second node indicates the availability status of the dynamic resources of the third node, it needs to indicate the availability status of the dynamic resources in the X area after the end time of the first indication area. In other words, when the first node has not yet indicated to the second node the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area, the second node needs to indicate the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area to the subordinate node in advance. If the second node blindly indicates the available status of the dynamic resources in the X area to the third node without considering the first node’s indication of the dynamic resources in the X area, it may follow up with the first node on the X area. The dynamic resource indicates conflicts.

在本实施例中,第二指示信息指示未被第一指示信息指示的该至少一个动态资源的状态为不可用,由此不会产生资源指示冲突的问题。下面结合图15做进一步说明。In this embodiment, the second indication information indicates that the state of the at least one dynamic resource that is not indicated by the first indication information is unavailable, so that no resource indication conflict problem occurs. A further description will be given below in conjunction with Figure 15.

图15示出了一种X区域资源配置的一例。在图15中,X区域内第二节点共包括第0、2、4时隙对应的三个soft资源,其中,第二节点根据资源配置信息,能够知道第2、4时隙对应的两个soft资源将会被第一节点所指示,也就是说,在X区域内,第二节点共包括第2、4时隙对应的两个动态资源。Fig. 15 shows an example of an X area resource configuration. In Figure 15, the second node in area X includes three soft resources corresponding to time slots 0, 2, and 4, where the second node can know the two soft resources corresponding to time slots 2 and 4 according to resource configuration information. The soft resource will be indicated by the first node, that is, in the X area, the second node includes two dynamic resources corresponding to the second and fourth time slots.

第二指示信息可以指示上述两个动态资源的状态为不可用,具体地,第二指示信息可以指示第三节点的第2、4时隙的MT资源为不可用。此时,无论将来第一节点对上述两个动态资源的指示结果如何(指示为可用或者不可用),都不会产生资源指示冲突的问题。The second indication information may indicate that the status of the above two dynamic resources is unavailable. Specifically, the second indication information may indicate that the MT resources of the second and fourth time slots of the third node are unavailable. At this time, no matter what the result of the indication of the above two dynamic resources by the first node in the future (the indication is available or unavailable), the problem of resource indication conflict will not arise.

在另外一种可能的实现中,第二指示信息不向第三节点指示未被第一指示信息指示的动态资源的可用状态。也就是说,第二指示信息的指示资源不包含未被第一指示信息指示的动态资源;或者说,第二指示信息的指示资源在X区域仅包含第二节点的固定资源。In another possible implementation, the second indication information does not indicate to the third node the available status of the dynamic resources not indicated by the first indication information. That is, the indication resource of the second indication information does not include dynamic resources that are not indicated by the first indication information; in other words, the indication resource of the second indication information only includes the fixed resources of the second node in the X area.

可选地,第二指示区域还包括Y个固定资源,第二指示信息指示该Y个固定资源中的Z个的可用状态为可用或者不可用,其中,Y、Z为大于或者等于0的整数,并且Z小于或者等于Y。Optionally, the second indication area further includes Y fixed resources, and the second indication information indicates that the availability status of Z of the Y fixed resources is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are integers greater than or equal to 0 , And Z is less than or equal to Y.

可选地,未被第一指示信息指示的Y个固定资源可以为该X区域内第二节点的固定资源。在图15中,第二节点共包括第0、1、3、5时隙四个固定资源(即Y值为4),其中,第0时隙对应第二节点不会被第一节点指示的soft资源,第1、3、5时隙为hard资源。Optionally, the Y fixed resources not indicated by the first indication information may be fixed resources of the second node in the X area. In Figure 15, the second node includes a total of four fixed resources of time slots 0, 1, 3, and 5 (that is, the Y value is 4), where the 0th time slot corresponds to the second node that will not be indicated by the first node Soft resources, the first time slots 1, 3, and 5 are hard resources.

第二指示信息可以对上述四个固定资源中的0个、1个或者多个的可用状态进行指示,例如指示为可用或者不可用。如图15所示,第二指示信息可以对第0、1时隙(即Z值为2)对应的固定资源进行指示。具体地,第二指示信息可以指示第三节点的第0、1时隙的MT资源为可用或者不可用。The second indication information may indicate the availability status of 0, 1, or more of the above four fixed resources, for example, indicate that they are available or unavailable. As shown in FIG. 15, the second indication information may indicate the fixed resources corresponding to the 0th and 1st time slots (that is, the Z value is 2). Specifically, the second indication information may indicate whether the MT resources of the 0th and 1st time slots of the third node are available or unavailable.

可选地,该Z个固定资源对应的第三节点的DU资源可以为第三节点的动态资源。Optionally, the DU resources of the third node corresponding to the Z fixed resources may be dynamic resources of the third node.

在步骤240中,第二节点向第三节点发送第二指示信息。In step 240, the second node sends second indication information to the third node.

应理解,第三节点收到第二节点发送的第二指示信息(也即相对于第三节点的第一指示信息)后的行为与第二节点收到第一指示信息后的行为可以一致,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the behavior of the third node after receiving the second indication information sent by the second node (that is, the first indication information relative to the third node) may be consistent with the behavior of the second node after receiving the first indication information. I will not repeat them here.

上文主要从第二节点的角度描述了本申请提供的资源指示方法,第一节点、第三节点的处理过程与第二节点的处理过程具有对应关系,例如,第二节点从第一节点接收第一指示信息,意味着第一节点向第二节点发送了第一指示信息;第二节点向第三节点发送第二指示信息,意味着第三节点从第二节点接收第二指示信息。因此,即使上文个别地方未明确写明第一节点、第三节点的处理过程,本领域技术人员也可以基于第二节点的处理过程清楚地了解第一节点、第三节点的处理过程。The above describes the resource indication method provided by this application mainly from the perspective of the second node. The processing procedures of the first node and the third node have a corresponding relationship with the processing procedures of the second node. For example, the second node receives from the first node. The first indication information means that the first node sends the first indication information to the second node; the second node sends the second indication information to the third node, which means that the third node receives the second indication information from the second node. Therefore, even if the processing procedures of the first node and the third node are not clearly stated in some places above, those skilled in the art can clearly understand the processing procedures of the first node and the third node based on the processing procedures of the second node.

本申请实施例第二节点获取自己的资源配置信息,并从上级节点接收指示第二节点在第一指示区域上的动态资源的可用状态的第一指示信息。当第二节点需要向下级节点指示的资源超出了其上级节点的指示时,第二节点根据自己的资源配置信息,确定超出了上级节点指示的资源如何向下级节点进行指示。由于第二节点的资源配置是固定的,即使提前向下级节点进行指示,后续收到的指示也不会和在前的指示发生冲突。In the embodiment of the present application, the second node obtains its own resource configuration information, and receives from the upper-level node the first indication information indicating the available status of the dynamic resource of the second node in the first indication area. When the resource that the second node needs to indicate to the subordinate node exceeds the instruction of the superior node, the second node determines how to instruct the subordinate node according to its resource configuration information. Since the resource configuration of the second node is fixed, even if instructions are given to subordinate nodes in advance, subsequent instructions received will not conflict with previous instructions.

图16示出了本申请提供的资源指示方法300,也能够避免资源指示冲突问题的产生。该方法300包括步骤310-340,下面将结合图16-18,对方法来300进行说明。FIG. 16 shows the resource indication method 300 provided by the present application, which can also avoid resource indication conflicts. The method 300 includes steps 310-340. The method 300 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 16-18.

类似的,在方法300中,第一节点为第二节点的上级节点,第三节点为第二节点的下级节点,以下不再赘述。Similarly, in the method 300, the first node is an upper-level node of the second node, and the third node is a lower-level node of the second node, which will not be described in detail below.

在步骤310中,第二节点获取资源配置信息,资源配置信息用于指示第二节点和第三节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置。In step 310, the second node obtains resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node.

第二节点的固定资源包括hard资源以及不会被第一节点指示可用状态的soft资源,而第二节点的动态资源包括会被第一节点指示可用状态的soft资源。The fixed resources of the second node include hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated as available by the first node, and the dynamic resources of the second node include soft resources that will be indicated as available by the first node.

第三节点的固定资源包括hard资源以及不会被第二节点指示可用状态的soft资源,而第三节点的动态资源包括会被第二节点指示可用状态的soft资源。The fixed resources of the third node include hard resources and soft resources that will not be indicated as available by the second node, and the dynamic resources of the third node include soft resources that will be indicated as available by the second node.

在一种可能的实现中,第二节点和第三节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置通过第二节点和第三节点的MT的资源配置推断得到,即第二节点和第三节点的固定资源和动态资源被隐式配置。In a possible implementation, the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node are inferred from the resource configuration of the MT of the second node and the third node, that is, the fixed resources of the second node and the third node And dynamic resources are implicitly configured.

也就是说,第二节点根据资源配置信息,能够确定第二节点的哪些soft资源会被上级节点所指示。同时,第二节点根据资源配置信息,能够确定需要对哪些第三节点的soft资源进行指示。或者,第二节点根据资源配置信息,能够确定需要对哪些第三节点的MT资源进行指示。That is, according to the resource configuration information, the second node can determine which soft resources of the second node will be indicated by the superior node. At the same time, the second node can determine which third node soft resources need to be indicated according to the resource configuration information. Alternatively, the second node can determine which third node's MT resources need to be indicated according to the resource configuration information.

在一种可能的实现中,第二节点不具有第三节点完整的固定资源和动态资源配置。例如,第二节点所指示的第三节点的MT资源中的一部分资源所对应的第三节点的DU资源可能不是动态资源,例如,可能是DU的不可用资源或hard资源。In a possible implementation, the second node does not have the complete fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the third node. For example, the DU resource of the third node corresponding to a part of the MT resources of the third node indicated by the second node may not be a dynamic resource, for example, it may be an unavailable resource or a hard resource of the DU.

一般情况下,第二节点和第三节点资源配置信息由第一节点通过不同的信令发送给第二节点。Generally, the resource configuration information of the second node and the third node is sent by the first node to the second node through different signaling.

在步骤320中,第二节点接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第二节点的第一指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态。In step 320, the second node receives the first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node.

步骤320可以参考方法200中的步骤220进行理解,在此不再赘述。Step 320 can be understood with reference to step 220 in the method 200, and details are not described herein again.

在步骤330中,第二节点根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,第二 指示信息用于指示第三节点的第二指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态,第二指示区域包括第一区域,第一区域上包含K个动态资源,第一区域位于第一指示区域结束位置之后,K为非负整数。In step 330, the second node determines second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information. The second indication information is used to indicate the availability of one or more of the dynamic resources on the second indication area of the third node. State, the second indication area includes the first area, the first area includes K dynamic resources, the first area is located after the end position of the first indication area, and K is a non-negative integer.

可选地,该第一区域可以是前述的X区域。Optionally, the first area may be the aforementioned X area.

前述方法200中资源配置信息用于指示第二节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置,本实施例中资源配置信息可以指示第二节点和第三节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置,因此,相对于前述的方法200,本实施例第二指示信息的确定综合考虑了第三节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置可能的影响。The resource configuration information in the aforementioned method 200 is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node. In this embodiment, the resource configuration information may indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the second node and the third node. In the aforementioned method 200, the determination of the second indication information in this embodiment comprehensively considers the possible impact of the configuration of the fixed resources and dynamic resources of the third node.

对于TDM场景下的隐式指示方式,第二指示信息用于指示第三节点的第二指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态,可以理解为第二指示信息指示第三节点对应的的MT资源的可用状态,下面将从第三节点的MT资源的角度讨论第二指示信息的确定方法。For the implicit indication mode in the TDM scenario, the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the second indication area of the third node, which can be understood as the second indication information indicating the third node For the corresponding available status of the MT resource, the method for determining the second indication information will be discussed below from the perspective of the MT resource of the third node.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第二节点向第三节点发送的第二指示信息所指示的第三节点的MT资源和会被第一节点指示的第二节点的动态资源正交。或者,第二节点向第三节点发送的第二指示信息所指示的第三节点的DU的动态资源和会被第一节点指示的第二节点的动态资源正交。In a possible implementation manner, the MT resource of the third node indicated by the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node is orthogonal to the dynamic resource of the second node that will be indicated by the first node. Alternatively, the dynamic resource of the DU of the third node indicated by the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node is orthogonal to the dynamic resource of the second node that will be indicated by the first node.

根据第二节点的资源配置信息,第一节点会指示第一指示区域时长内的部分或全部动态资源的可用状态。根据上文对第二节点的资源配置信息的说明,第二节点根据第二节点的资源配置信息,可以知道哪些soft资源是需要第一节点进行指示的。因此,第二节点在提前向第三节点指示X区域的MT资源的可用状态时,始终将第一指示区域后的可能会被第一节点指示的DU资源所对应的MT资源释放(或指示为不可用),就可以避免冲突的发生。According to the resource configuration information of the second node, the first node will indicate the available status of some or all of the dynamic resources in the first indication area. According to the above description of the resource configuration information of the second node, the second node can know which soft resources need to be indicated by the first node according to the resource configuration information of the second node. Therefore, when the second node indicates to the third node the available status of the MT resources in the X area in advance, it will always release the MT resources corresponding to the DU resources that may be indicated by the first node after the first indication area (or indicate as Unavailable), you can avoid conflicts.

具体地,第二节点可以根据资源配置信息,确定X区域上包含的K个第三节点的MT资源的可用状态(是否被释放),K个MT资源在时域上对应的第二节点DU的时域资源属于第二节点的资源配置信息中包含的固定资源,第二节点可以根据所确定的K个MT资源的可用状态确定第二指示信息,或者说第二节点可以根据所确定的K个MT资源的可用状态生成并向第三节点发送第二指示信息。Specifically, the second node may determine the available status (whether released) of the MT resources of the K third nodes contained in the X area according to the resource configuration information, and the K MT resources corresponding to the second node DU in the time domain The time domain resource belongs to the fixed resource included in the resource configuration information of the second node. The second node may determine the second indication information according to the determined availability status of the K MT resources, or the second node may determine the second indication information according to the determined K MT resources. The available status of the MT resource is generated and the second indication information is sent to the third node.

图17示出了X区域资源配置的一例。在图17中,第二节点根据资源配置信息,确定第三节点的X区域上包含的K个MT资源的可用状态,例如,可以确定K个MT资源中的一个或者多个为可用,其余的为不可用。Fig. 17 shows an example of the resource allocation of the X area. In FIG. 17, the second node determines the available status of the K MT resources contained in the X area of the third node according to the resource configuration information. For example, it may be determined that one or more of the K MT resources are available, and the rest Is not available.

在X区域,可以配置第二节点的动态资源(即第0、2、4时隙对应的第二节点的DU的soft资源)与第三节点的待指示MT资源(即第1、3、5时隙对应的第三节点的MT资源,此时K值为3)在时域上正交,从而在下一周期的第一指示信息(即图12中第二节点的第二个第一指示DCI)和第二指示信息(即图12中第二节点的第一个第二指示DCI)对各自的动态资源进行指示时,不会发生冲突,并且,第二指示信息可以指示确定K个MT资源的可用状态,例如,可以指示该K个资源中的一个或者多个为可用,其余的为不可用。In the X area, you can configure the dynamic resources of the second node (that is, the soft resources of the DU of the second node corresponding to time slots 0, 2, and 4) and the to-be-indicated MT resources of the third node (that is, the first 1, 3, and 5 The MT resource of the third node corresponding to the time slot, where the K value is 3) is orthogonal in the time domain, so that the first indication information of the next cycle (that is, the second first indication DCI of the second node in Figure 12) ) And the second indication information (that is, the first second indication DCI of the second node in FIG. 12) when indicating respective dynamic resources, no conflict occurs, and the second indication information can indicate that K MT resources are determined For example, it may indicate that one or more of the K resources are available, and the rest are unavailable.

其中,第二节点的动态资源和第三节点的待指示MT资源在时域上正交,可以理解为第二节点的动态资源和第三节点的待指示MT资源在时域上错开,不发生重叠(或者说, 不对应)。Among them, the dynamic resource of the second node and the MT resource to be instructed of the third node are orthogonal in the time domain. It can be understood that the dynamic resource of the second node and the MT resource to be instructed of the third node are staggered in the time domain and do not occur. Overlap (or rather, not correspond).

或者,第二节点的MT资源(由第一节点向第二节点指示)和DU资源(由第二节点向第三节点指示)满足时分复用,或不违背半双工约束。第三节点的动态资源在时域上与第二节点的固定资源相对应,或者说第三节点会被指示的MT资源在时域上与第二节点DU的固定资源相对应。Alternatively, the MT resource (indicated by the first node to the second node) and the DU resource (indicated by the second node to the third node) of the second node satisfy the time division multiplexing, or do not violate the half-duplex constraint. The dynamic resource of the third node corresponds to the fixed resource of the second node in the time domain, or the MT resource that the third node will be instructed corresponds to the fixed resource of the second node DU in the time domain.

或者说,第二节点被指示的动态资源对应的第三节点的MT资源不会被指示。In other words, the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the dynamic resource indicated by the second node will not be indicated.

因此,可以配置该K个第三节点的MT资源(中的每一个)在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点的(资源配置信息中包含的)固定资源。第二节点的固定资源不会被第一指示信息所指示,或第二节点的固定资源始终为可用的,因此,第二指示信息可以对其在时域上对应的第三节点的时域资源进行指示。Therefore, the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the MT resources of the K third nodes (each of them) in the time domain can be configured to belong to the fixed resources (included in the resource configuration information) of the second node. The fixed resource of the second node will not be indicated by the first indication information, or the fixed resource of the second node is always available. Therefore, the second indication information can correspond to the time domain resource of the third node in the time domain. Give instructions.

第二节点可以根据资源配置信息,确定X区域上包含的K个第三节点的MT资源的可用状态,并且根据K个资源的可用状态确定第二指示信息。The second node may determine the available status of the MT resources of the K third nodes contained in the X area according to the resource configuration information, and determine the second indication information according to the available status of the K resources.

可以理解的是,通过正交指示的方式,第二节点即使提前向第三节点指示X区域的MT资源的可用状态,也可以天然地避免和第一节点的后续指示发生冲突。It can be understood that by means of orthogonal indications, even if the second node indicates the available status of the MT resources in the X area to the third node in advance, it can naturally avoid conflicts with subsequent indications of the first node.

在另一种可能的实施方式中,第二节点向第三节点发送的第二指示信息所指示的第三节点的MT资源和会被第一节点指示的动态资源不正交。但是,可以通过对第二节点的指示内容做一些约束,来避免冲突的发生。In another possible implementation manner, the MT resource of the third node indicated by the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node and the dynamic resource to be indicated by the first node are not orthogonal. However, it is possible to avoid conflicts by making some constraints on the content of the instructions of the second node.

具体地,第二节点可以根据资源配置信息,将X区域上包含的K个第三节点的MT资源中的N个指示为不可用,或者第二节点将此N个第三节点的MT资源释放,该N个MT资源在时域上对应的所述第二节点DU的时域资源属于第二节点的资源配置信息中包含的动态资源,N为小于或者等于K的非负整数,第二节点根据K个MT资源的可用状态确定第二指示信息。或者说,第二节点根据K个MT资源的可用状态生成并向第三节点发送第二指示信息。Specifically, the second node may indicate N of the MT resources of the K third nodes contained in the X area as unavailable according to the resource configuration information, or the second node may release the MT resources of the N third nodes , The time domain resources of the second node DU corresponding to the N MT resources in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources included in the resource configuration information of the second node, and N is a non-negative integer less than or equal to K, and the second node The second indication information is determined according to the available status of the K MT resources. In other words, the second node generates and sends second indication information to the third node according to the available status of the K MT resources.

具体地,图18示出了X区域资源配置的另一例。在图18中,第二节点根据资源配置信息,确定第三节点的X区域上包含的K个MT资源的可用状态。Specifically, FIG. 18 shows another example of the resource configuration of the X area. In FIG. 18, the second node determines the available status of the K MT resources contained in the X area of the third node according to the resource configuration information.

具体地,前述图17所示的实施例中,第三节点的K个MT资源与第二节点中的动态资源在时域上正交,本实施例将讨论第三节点的该K个MT资源与第二节点中的动态资源在时域上不正交的情况。此时,第三节点的K个MT资源中的一部分(即N个)在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点的(资源配置信息中包含的)动态资源,或者,第三节点的K个MT资源中的全部在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点的动态资源。Specifically, in the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 17, the K MT resources of the third node and the dynamic resources of the second node are orthogonal in the time domain. This embodiment will discuss the K MT resources of the third node. It is not orthogonal to the dynamic resources in the second node in the time domain. At this time, a part (ie, N) of the K MT resources of the third node correspond to the time domain resources of the second node in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources of the second node (included in the resource configuration information), or, All of the K MT resources of the third node corresponding to the time domain resources of the second node in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources of the second node.

如图18所示,在X区域,第二节点的动态资源可以配置为第0、2、4时隙对应的第二节点的DU的soft资源,第三节点的的待指示MT资源可以配置为第0-5时隙对应的第三节点的MT资源,也就是说,第三节点的第0-5号共6个时隙均为第三节点的MT的待指示资源。As shown in Figure 18, in the X area, the dynamic resource of the second node can be configured as the soft resource of the DU of the second node corresponding to time slots 0, 2, and 4, and the to-be-indicated MT resource of the third node can be configured as The MT resources of the third node corresponding to the 0-5th time slots, that is, the 6th time slots 0-5 of the third node are all to-be-indicated resources of the MT of the third node.

其中,第三节点的第1、3、5时隙在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点DU的固定资源,因此,第二指示信息可以任意确定上述3个(即K与N的差值)MT资源的可用状态,例如,可以确定3个资源中的一个或者多个为可用,其余的为不可用。Among them, the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the first, third, and fifth time slots of the third node in the time domain belong to the fixed resources of the second node DU. Therefore, the second indication information can arbitrarily determine the above three (ie The difference between K and N) the available status of the MT resource. For example, it can be determined that one or more of the three resources are available, and the rest are unavailable.

其中,第三节点的第0、2、4时隙在时域上对应的第二节点的时域资源属于第二节点 DU的动态资源,此时对第三节点的上述第0、2、4时隙的指示(即第二指示信息的内容)应当被约束。Among them, the time domain resources of the second node corresponding to the 0th, 2nd, and 4th time slots of the third node in the time domain belong to the dynamic resources of the second node DU. The indication of the time slot (that is, the content of the second indication information) should be restricted.

具体地,协议可以规定将第三节点的上述N个(即第0、2、4共3个时隙)第三节点的MT资源指示为不可用(释放),或将其对应的N个第三节点DU的动态资源指示为可用。Specifically, the protocol may specify that the MT resources of the third node of the third node are indicated as unavailable (released) for the aforementioned N (ie, the 0th, 2nd, and 4th time slots), or the corresponding Nth The dynamic resource indication of the three-node DU is available.

也就是说,第二节点被指示的soft资源对应的第三节点的MT资源也可以被指示,此时可以指示第三节点的MT资源为不可用。That is, the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the soft resource indicated by the second node may also be indicated, and at this time, it may indicate that the MT resource of the third node is unavailable.

因此,第二节点可以根据K-N(即K与N的差值)个MT资源的可用性(可用,或者不可用),以及该N个MT资源的可用性(不可用)确定该第二指示信息。Therefore, the second node may determine the second indication information according to the availability (available or unavailable) of K-N (that is, the difference between K and N) MT resources and the availability (unavailable) of the N MT resources.

作为另外一个可能的实施方式,也可以对第二节点的上述N个动态资源的指示(即第一指示信息的内容)进行限定。As another possible implementation manner, the indication of the aforementioned N dynamic resources of the second node (that is, the content of the first indication information) may also be limited.

具体地,协议可以规定将第二节点的上述N个动态资源(显式或隐式)指示为可用。Specifically, the protocol may specify that the above-mentioned N dynamic resources (explicit or implicit) of the second node are indicated as available.

也就是说,第二节点被指示的soft资源对应的第三节点的MT资源也可以被指示。此时协议可以规定第二节点被指示的N个动态资源为不可用,在该前提下,第二指示信息可以任意指示上述N个动态资源的可用状态,例如,可以确定该N个资源中的一个或者多个为可用,其余的为不可用。That is, the MT resource of the third node corresponding to the soft resource indicated by the second node may also be indicated. At this time, the protocol can specify that the N dynamic resources indicated by the second node are unavailable. Under this premise, the second indication information can arbitrarily indicate the availability status of the above N dynamic resources. For example, it can be determined that One or more are available, and the rest are unavailable.

也就是说,此时第二指示信息可以任意指示上述K个动态资源的可用状态,例如,可以指示K个资源中的一个或者多个为可用,其余的为不可用。第二节点可以根据该K个动态资源的可用状态确定该第二指示信息。That is, at this time, the second indication information can arbitrarily indicate the available status of the K dynamic resources, for example, it can indicate that one or more of the K resources are available, and the rest are unavailable. The second node may determine the second indication information according to the available status of the K dynamic resources.

综合考虑第二指示信息对第三节点S区域和X区域的MT资源或DU动态资源的指示,可以得到如下准则:Considering the indications of the second indication information to the MT resources or DU dynamic resources of the S area and X area of the third node, the following criteria can be obtained:

1)当第三节点的一个MT资源对应于第二节点DU的固定资源时,第二节点可通过第二指示信息或其余动态信令指示该MT资源的可用性(可用或不可用);1) When one MT resource of the third node corresponds to the fixed resource of the second node DU, the second node can indicate the availability (available or unavailable) of the MT resource through the second indication information or other dynamic signaling;

2)当第三节点的一个MT资源对应于第二节点DU的不可用资源时,第二节点可通过第二指示信息或其余动态信令指示该MT资源的可用性为不可用,或第二节点不对该MT资源的可用性进行指示;2) When an MT resource of the third node corresponds to an unavailable resource of the second node DU, the second node can indicate that the availability of the MT resource is unavailable through the second indication information or other dynamic signaling, or the second node No indication of the availability of the MT resource;

3)当第三节点的一个MT资源对应于第二节点DU的动态资源,且第二节点通过第一指示信息或其余动态信令获知此动态资源被(显式或隐式)指示为不可用时,第二节点可通过第二指示信息或其余动态信令指示该MT资源的可用性为不可用,或第二节点不对该MT资源的可用性进行指示;3) When one MT resource of the third node corresponds to the dynamic resource of the second node DU, and the second node learns through the first indication information or other dynamic signaling that this dynamic resource is indicated (explicitly or implicitly) as unavailable , The second node may indicate that the availability of the MT resource is unavailable through the second indication information or other dynamic signaling, or the second node may not indicate the availability of the MT resource;

4)当第三节点的一个MT资源对应于第二节点DU的动态资源,且第二节点通过第一指示信息或其余动态信令获知此动态资源被(显式或隐式)指示为可用时,第二节点可通过第二指示信息指示该MT资源的可用性(可用或不可用)。4) When one MT resource of the third node corresponds to the dynamic resource of the second node DU, and the second node learns through the first indication information or other dynamic signaling that this dynamic resource is indicated (explicitly or implicitly) as available , The second node can indicate the availability (available or unavailable) of the MT resource through the second indication information.

5)当第三节点的一个MT资源对应于第二节点DU的动态资源,但第二节点还未获取到第一指示信息或其余动态信令对该动态资源的指示时,第二节点可通过第二指示信息指示该MT资源的可用性为不可用,或第二节点不对该MT资源的可用性进行指示。5) When an MT resource of the third node corresponds to the dynamic resource of the second node DU, but the second node has not yet obtained the first indication information or other dynamic signaling indicating the dynamic resource, the second node can pass The second indication information indicates that the availability of the MT resource is unavailable, or the second node does not indicate the availability of the MT resource.

在5)中,第二节点还未获取到第一指示信息对该动态资源的指示表示第二节点还未收到对应的第一指示信息,或第二节点收到对应的第一指示信息的时间不超过一个门限, 所述门限包括译码时延,协议定义时延等。在一种可能的实现方式中,第一节点不具有第二节点向第三节点发送的第二指示信息的内容。此时,第二节点也可以向第一节点发送第二指示信息中的一部分或者全部信息。例如,该一部分或者全部信息可以包括:第二指示区域的相关信息(例如,起始时间、结束时间、持续时间、指示时延等信息)、第三节点的动态资源的资源标识、X区域的动态资源的标识等。In 5), the indication that the second node has not obtained the first indication information for the dynamic resource indicates that the second node has not received the corresponding first indication information, or the second node has received the corresponding first indication information The time does not exceed a threshold, and the threshold includes decoding delay, protocol-defined delay, etc. In a possible implementation manner, the first node does not have the content of the second indication information sent by the second node to the third node. At this time, the second node may also send part or all of the second indication information to the first node. For example, this part or all of the information may include: related information of the second indication area (for example, start time, end time, duration, indication delay, etc.), the resource identifier of the dynamic resource of the third node, and the information of the X area Identification of dynamic resources, etc.

在一种可能的实现方式中,可以通过锁定信令锁定第二节点或者第三节点的动态资源(例如,该X区域的动态资源),对于被锁定的第二节点的动态资源,第二节点认为上述动态资源会始终被指示为可用,或者始终被指示为不可用。In a possible implementation manner, the dynamic resources of the second node or the third node (for example, the dynamic resources of the X area) can be locked through locking signaling. For the locked dynamic resources of the second node, the second node It is considered that the above dynamic resources will always be indicated as available or always indicated as unavailable.

或者,对于被锁定的第三节点的动态资源,第二节点会始终认为下级节点会使用或不使用此资源。Or, for the locked dynamic resource of the third node, the second node will always think that the lower-level node will use or not use this resource.

该锁定信令可以通过多种信令传输,例如MAC CE。The locking signaling can be transmitted through various signaling, such as MAC CE.

可选的,锁定资源也可以是MT资源。例如,第一节点向第二节点发送信令,指示第二节点的若干MT资源被锁定。则第二节点认为这些资源始终会被释放,或始终不会被释放。Optionally, the locked resource may also be an MT resource. For example, the first node sends signaling to the second node, indicating that several MT resources of the second node are locked. Then the second node thinks that these resources will always be released, or will never be released.

在步骤240中,第二节点向第三节点发送第二指示信息。In step 240, the second node sends second indication information to the third node.

具体地,第二节点的DU向第三节点的MT发送第二指示信息,作为一种可能的实现方式,为了保证第二节点顺利的将第二指示消息发送至第三节点,协议可以规定,该第二指示消息所在的时域资源(具体地,指第二节点的DU资源)始终不会被第一指示消息指示为不可用。Specifically, the DU of the second node sends the second indication information to the MT of the third node. As a possible implementation, in order to ensure that the second node sends the second indication message to the third node smoothly, the protocol may stipulate: The time domain resource (specifically, the DU resource of the second node) where the second indication message is located will never be indicated as unavailable by the first indication message.

本申请实施例第二节点获取资源配置信息,该资源配置信息能够指示自己和第三节点的资源配置,并从上级节点接收指示第二节点在第一指示区域上的动态资源的可用状态的第一指示信息。当第二节点需要向下级节点指示的资源超出了其上级节点的指示时,第二节点根据该资源配置信息,确定超出了上级节点指示的资源如何向下级节点进行指示。由于第二节点、第三节点的资源配置是固定的,即使提前向下级节点进行指示,后续收到的指示也不会和在前的指示发生冲突。The second node in the embodiment of the present application obtains resource configuration information, which can indicate the resource configuration of itself and the third node, and receives from the upper-level node the second node indicating the availability status of the dynamic resources of the second node in the first indication area. One instruction information. When the resource that the second node needs to indicate to the subordinate node exceeds the instruction of the superior node, the second node determines how to instruct the subordinate node according to the resource configuration information. Since the resource configuration of the second node and the third node is fixed, even if an instruction is given to the subordinate node in advance, the subsequent received instruction will not conflict with the previous instruction.

图19示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的另一例。Fig. 19 shows another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

与图12所示的实施例相比,本申请有多个(例如两个)指示DCI共同指示一个指示区域,从而能够增加指示DCI的健壮性。此时多个指示DCI具有不同的指示时延。Compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, this application has multiple (for example, two) indicator DCIs that collectively indicate an indicator area, so that the robustness of the indicator DCI can be increased. At this time, multiple indication DCIs have different indication delays.

其中,第一指示DCI的第一指示区域的开始位置与第一个第二指示DCI所在资源的开始位置重合,并且一直延续到下一周期第一个第二指示DCI所在资源的开始位置,或者说,一直延续到下一周期第一指示DCI的指示区域的开始位置。Wherein, the start position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI coincides with the start position of the resource where the first second indication DCI is located, and continues to the start position of the resource where the first second indication DCI is located in the next cycle, or That is, it continues until the start position of the indicator area of the first indicator DCI in the next cycle.

应理解,前述的方法200或者方法300同样能够适用于图19所示的多跳IAB系统,用来对动态资源进行指示。It should be understood that the aforementioned method 200 or method 300 can also be applied to the multi-hop IAB system shown in FIG. 19 to indicate dynamic resources.

图20示出了多跳IAB系统中DCI配置的另一例。Fig. 20 shows another example of DCI configuration in a multi-hop IAB system.

本实施例的第二指示区域的结束时间同样在第一指示区域的结束时间之后,因此,本实施例同样会出现X区域,但是,本实施例并不会产生资源指示的冲突问题。The end time of the second indication area in this embodiment is also after the end time of the first indication area. Therefore, the X area will also appear in this embodiment, but this embodiment does not cause resource indication conflicts.

具体地,本实施例和前述实施例的指示区域不同。本实施例仍然存在指示时延,在图18中,第一指示DCI的第一指示区域的起始位置不提前于第二指示DCI所在资源的发送位置,并且第一指示DCI的第一指示区域的结束时间不超过第二节点接收下一周期第一指 示DCI的资源位置。Specifically, the indication area of this embodiment is different from the previous embodiment. This embodiment still has indication delay. In FIG. 18, the start position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI is not earlier than the transmission position of the resource where the second indication DCI is located, and the first indication area of the first indication DCI is The end time of is not longer than the second node receiving the resource location of the first indication DCI in the next cycle.

此时,在X区域上,第一指示DCI并不会对X区域上第二节点的动态资源进行指示,因此,即使第二指示DCI会对X区域上第三节点的MT资源提前进行指示,也不会产生资源指示冲突的问题,此时第二节点可以任意确定X区域上第三节点的动态资源的可用状态。At this time, in the X area, the first indication DCI will not indicate the dynamic resources of the second node in the X area. Therefore, even if the second indication DCI will indicate in advance the MT resources of the third node in the X area, There is no problem of resource indication conflicts, and the second node can arbitrarily determine the available state of the dynamic resources of the third node in the X area.

然而,本实施例存在指示范围减少的问题。However, this embodiment has a problem that the indication range is reduced.

具体地,由于存在指示时延,并且该指示时延的时长大于或者等于处理时延,指示DCI不会对该段时间(此区域的范围可能较大)内的动态资源进行指示,从而使动态指示范围所占的比例减少,影响了动态指示的性能。Specifically, because there is an indication delay, and the length of the indication delay is greater than or equal to the processing delay, the indication DCI will not indicate the dynamic resources in this period of time (the range of this area may be large), so that dynamic The proportion of the indication range is reduced, which affects the performance of the dynamic indication.

前述讨论的前提条件时一个指示DCI对应一个指示区域,类似的,作为一种可能的实现方式,可以多个指示DCI指示一个共同的指示区域,此时可以进行如下限定:The precondition of the foregoing discussion is that one indication DCI corresponds to one indication area. Similarly, as a possible implementation, multiple indication DCIs can indicate a common indication area. In this case, the following restrictions can be made:

1.第一指示DCI的第一指示区域的起始位置不提前于第二节点发送多个第二指示DCI的多个资源中的任意一个资源位置,例如,第一个或最后一个第二指示DCI的资源位置;1. The start position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI is not earlier than the position of any one of the multiple resources for sending multiple second indication DCIs by the second node, for example, the first or last second indication Resource location of DCI;

2.第一指示DCI的第一指示区域的结束位置不超过第二节点接收下一周期多个第一指示DCI的多个资源中的任意一个资源位置,例如,第一个或最后一个第一指示DCI的资源位置。2. The end position of the first indication area of the first indication DCI does not exceed the second node receiving any one of the multiple first indication DCI resources in the next cycle, for example, the first one or the last one Indicates the resource location of DCI.

前文多个实施例讨论了避免动态资源分配冲突的多种方法,下面讨论当IAB节点未被配置指示DCI,或者配置了但是在搜索空间内未检测到指示DCI的行为。The previous embodiments discussed various methods to avoid dynamic resource allocation conflicts. The following discusses when the IAB node is not configured to indicate DCI, or is configured but does not detect the behavior of indicating DCI in the search space.

仍然以前文中的第二节点为例,当第二节点未检测到第一指示DCI时,该第二节点的MT可以在所有可选资源的搜索空间上进行PDCCH监测,该可选资源为不与第二节点的DU的固定资源冲突的MT资源;Still taking the second node in the previous article as an example, when the second node does not detect the first indication DCI, the MT of the second node can perform PDCCH monitoring on the search space of all optional resources. MT resource conflicting with the fixed resource of the DU of the second node;

或者,根据第一节点的调度进行PDSCH的接收;Or, perform PDSCH reception according to the scheduling of the first node;

或者,根据第一节点的调度进行PUSCH的发送和/或PUCCH的发送。Or, PUSCH transmission and/or PUCCH transmission are performed according to the scheduling of the first node.

可选地,第二节点可以接收高层配置的参考信号,例如CSI-RS;Optionally, the second node may receive a reference signal configured by a higher layer, such as a CSI-RS;

可选地,第二节点不发送高层配置的参考信号,例如SRS。Optionally, the second node does not send a reference signal configured by a higher layer, such as an SRS.

下面对第二节点未检测到第一指示DCI后,其第二指示DCI的发送行为进行讨论。The following discusses the sending behavior of the second indicator DCI after the second node does not detect the first indicator DCI.

作为一种可能的实施方式,当IAB节点未检测到第一指示DCI后,其放弃发送第二指示DCI。As a possible implementation manner, when the IAB node does not detect the first indication DCI, it gives up sending the second indication DCI.

作为一种可能的实施方式,当IAB节点未检测到第一指示DCI后,其第二指示DCI采用正交指示,即第二节点发送的第二指示DCI将其所有DU soft资源所对应的第三节点的MT资源释放。As a possible implementation manner, when the IAB node does not detect the first indication DCI, its second indication DCI adopts an orthogonal indication, that is, the second indication DCI sent by the second node uses the second indication DCI corresponding to all its DU soft resources. The MT resources of the three nodes are released.

以上对本申请提供的指示资源的方法进行了详细说明,下面介绍本申请提供的指示资源的装置。The method for indicating resources provided by this application is described in detail above, and the device for indicating resources provided by this application is introduced below.

参见图21,图21是本申请提供的指示资源的装置500的示意性结构框图。如图21所示,装置500包括处理单元510和收发单元520。Refer to FIG. 21, which is a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus 500 for indicating resources provided in this application. As shown in FIG. 21, the device 500 includes a processing unit 510 and a transceiver unit 520.

收发单元510,用于获取资源配置信息,资源配置信息用于指示装置和第三节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置;The transceiver unit 510 is configured to obtain resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information is used to indicate the configuration of fixed resources and dynamic resources of the device and the third node;

收发单元510,还用于接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示所述装置的第一指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态,第一节点为所述装置的 上级节点;The transceiver unit 510 is further configured to receive first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the device, and the first node Is the superior node of the device;

处理单元520,用于根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上装置500和第三节点之间的资源的可用状态,第二指示区域包括未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源,第二指示信息指示未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源的状态为不可用;The processing unit 520 is configured to determine second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information, the second indication information is used to indicate the available status of the resource between the device 500 and the third node in the second indication area, and the second indication The area includes at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates that the state of the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is unavailable;

收发单元510,还用于向第三节点发送第二指示信息,第三节点为所述装置的下级节点。The transceiver unit 510 is further configured to send second indication information to a third node, and the third node is a subordinate node of the device.

在一个实施例中,处理单元520具体用于:第二指示区域还包括未被第一指示信息指示的Y个固定资源,所述第二指示信息指示所述Y个固定资源中的Z个的可用状态为可用或者不可用,其中,Y、Z为大于或者等于0的整数,并且Z小于或者等于Y。In an embodiment, the processing unit 520 is specifically configured to: the second indication area further includes Y fixed resources that are not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates that Z of the Y fixed resources The available status is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are integers greater than or equal to 0, and Z is less than or equal to Y.

在再一个实施例中,第一指示区域上包含的动态资源包括第一动态资源,第一指示信息指示的一个或多个动态资源包括所述第一动态资源,以及,收发单元510还用于:In still another embodiment, the dynamic resources included in the first indication area include the first dynamic resources, the one or more dynamic resources indicated by the first indication information include the first dynamic resources, and the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to :

从第一节点接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息指示第一动态资源的可用状态,第三指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态与第一指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态不同,第三指示信息在时域上位于第一指示信息之后;根据第三指示信息指示的第一动态资源的可用状态,确定所述第一动态资源的可用状态。Receive third indication information from the first node, the third indication information indicating the available status of the first dynamic resource, the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information and the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the first indication information Differently, the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; the available status of the first dynamic resource is determined according to the available status of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information.

可选地,装置500可以为芯片或集成电路。Alternatively, the device 500 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.

本申请实施例中所述的芯片,可以是现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)、中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU)、网络处理器(Network Processor,NP)、数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU、可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其它集成芯片。The chip described in the embodiment of the application may be a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), and a central Processor (central processor unit, CPU), network processor (Network Processor, NP), digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), can also be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit, MCU, programmable controller ( programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.

可选地,处理单元510可以为处理器。收发单元510可以由接收单元和发送单元组成。收发单元520可以为收发器,收发器可以包括发射机和接收机,同时具备接收和发送的功能。可选地,收发单元510还可以为输入输出接口,或者输入输出电路。Optionally, the processing unit 510 may be a processor. The transceiver unit 510 may be composed of a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. The transceiver unit 520 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver, and has both receiving and sending functions. Optionally, the transceiver unit 510 may also be an input/output interface or an input/output circuit.

在另一种可能的方式中,收发单元520可以为通信接口。例如,输入输出接口,输入接口电路和输出接口电路等。In another possible manner, the transceiver unit 520 may be a communication interface. For example, input and output interfaces, input interface circuits and output interface circuits.

应理解,装置500可以对应本申请提供的指示资源的方法实施例中的第二节点。装置500包括的各单元分别用于实现方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或流程。It should be understood that the apparatus 500 may correspond to the second node in the embodiment of the method for indicating resources provided in this application. The units included in the apparatus 500 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or procedures performed by the second node in the method embodiments.

例如,收发单元510还用于获取资源配置信息,第一指示信息。处理单元520用于根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息。又例如,收发单元510还用于向第三节点发送第二指示信息。For example, the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to obtain resource configuration information, first indication information. The processing unit 520 is configured to determine second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information. For another example, the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to send second indication information to the third node.

本申请还提供一种网络设备1000,下面结合图22进行说明。The present application also provides a network device 1000, which is described below with reference to FIG. 22.

参见图22,图22是本申请提供的一种网络设备1000的结构示意图。网络设备1000用于实现方法实施例中第二节点的功能。如图22所示,网络设备1000包括天线1101、射频装置1102、基带装置1103。天线1101与射频装置1102连接。在下行方向,射频装置1102通过天线1101接收其他网络设备发送的信号,并将接收的信号发送给基带装置1103进行处理。在上行方向,基带装置1103对需要发送给其他网络设备的信号进行处理,并发送给射频装置1102,射频装置1102对所述信号进行处理后经过天线1101发送给其 他网络设备。Referring to FIG. 22, FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 1000 provided in this application. The network device 1000 is used to implement the function of the second node in the method embodiment. As shown in FIG. 22, the network device 1000 includes an antenna 1101, a radio frequency device 1102, and a baseband device 1103. The antenna 1101 is connected to the radio frequency device 1102. In the downlink direction, the radio frequency device 1102 receives signals sent by other network devices through the antenna 1101, and sends the received signals to the baseband device 1103 for processing. In the upstream direction, the baseband device 1103 processes the signals that need to be sent to other network devices and sends them to the radio frequency device 1102. The radio frequency device 1102 processes the signals and sends them to other network devices via the antenna 1101.

基带装置1103可以包括一个或多个处理单元11031。此外,基带装置1103还可以包括存储单元11032和通信接口11033。存储单元11032用于存储程序和数据。通信接口11033用于与射频装置1102交互信息。通信接口11033可以为输入输出接口或者输入输出电路。The baseband device 1103 may include one or more processing units 11031. In addition, the baseband device 1103 may further include a storage unit 11032 and a communication interface 11033. The storage unit 11032 is used to store programs and data. The communication interface 11033 is used to exchange information with the radio frequency device 1102. The communication interface 11033 may be an input/output interface or an input/output circuit.

上述装置实施例中的网络设备1000可以与方法实施例中的第二节点完全对应,网络设备1000所包括的相应单元用于执行方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应步骤。The network device 1000 in the above apparatus embodiment may completely correspond to the second node in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit included in the network device 1000 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the second node in the method embodiment.

例如,射频装置1102从第一节点获取资源配置信息和第一指示信息,并发送给基带装置1103。基带装置1103根据第一指示信息和资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,并将第二指示信息发送给射频装置1102。射频装置1102向第三节点发送第二指示信息。For example, the radio frequency device 1102 obtains resource configuration information and first indication information from the first node, and sends them to the baseband device 1103. The baseband device 1103 determines second indication information according to the first indication information and resource configuration information, and sends the second indication information to the radio frequency device 1102. The radio frequency device 1102 sends second indication information to the third node.

又例如,射频装置1102从第一节点接收第三指示信息,并将第三指示信息发送给基带装置1103。基带装置1103根据第三指示信息确定第一动态资源的可用状态。For another example, the radio frequency device 1102 receives the third instruction information from the first node, and sends the third instruction information to the baseband device 1103. The baseband device 1103 determines the available state of the first dynamic resource according to the third indication information.

此外,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行任一方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或流程。In addition, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions. When the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations performed by the second node in any method embodiment. And/or process.

本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请提供的指示资源的方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或流程。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations performed by the second node in the embodiment of the method for indicating resources provided by this application. And/or process.

本申请还提供一种通信系统,该通信系统至少包括第一节点、第二节点、和第三节点,其中,第一节点用于执行图14或者图16中由第一节点执行的操作和/或处理,第二节点用于执行图14或者图16中由第二节点执行的操作和/或处理,第三节点用于执行图14或者图16中由第三节点执行的操作和/或处理。The present application also provides a communication system, which includes at least a first node, a second node, and a third node, where the first node is used to perform operations performed by the first node in FIG. 14 or FIG. 16 and/ Or processing, the second node is used to perform the operation and/or processing performed by the second node in Figure 14 or Figure 16, and the third node is used to perform the operation and/or processing performed by the third node in Figure 14 or Figure 16 .

本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请提供的指示资源的方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或流程。This application also provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operation and/or process executed by the second node in the method embodiment for indicating resources provided in this application.

可选地,芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器连接。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中的计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor. The processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.

进一步可选地,芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收需要处理的信号和/或数据,处理器从通信接口获取该信号和/或数据,并对其进行处理。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data that need to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data from the communication interface and processes them.

可选地,通信接口可以是输入输出接口,具体可以包括输入接口和输出接口。或者,通信接口可以是输入输出电路,具体可以包括输入电路和输出电路。Optionally, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, which may specifically include an input interface and an output interface. Alternatively, the communication interface may be an input/output circuit, which may specifically include an input circuit and an output circuit.

上述实施例中涉及的存储器与存储器可以是物理上相互独立的单元,或者,存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。The memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may also be integrated with the processor.

以上装置实施例中所述的装置500可以为基带装置1103上的芯片,该芯片包括至少一个处理单元和接口电路。其中,处理元件用于执行以上网络设备(也即第二IAB节点)执行的任一种方法的各个步骤,接口电路用于与其它装置通信。The device 500 described in the above device embodiments may be a chip on the baseband device 1103, and the chip includes at least one processing unit and an interface circuit. Wherein, the processing element is used to execute each step of any method executed by the above network device (that is, the second IAB node), and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices.

在一种实现中,网络设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以通过处理单元调度程序的形式实现。例如,处理单元11031调用存储单元11032存储的程序,以执行以上方法实施例中第一IAB节点执行的方法。存储单元11032可以为处理单元11031处于同一芯片上, 即片内存储单元,也可以为与处理单元11031处于不同芯片上的存储元件,即片外存储单元。In one implementation, the unit for the network device to implement each step in the above method can be implemented in the form of a processing unit scheduler. For example, the processing unit 11031 calls a program stored in the storage unit 11032 to execute the method executed by the first IAB node in the above method embodiment. The storage unit 11032 may be the processing unit 11031 on the same chip, that is, an on-chip storage unit, or may be a storage element on a different chip from the processing unit 11031, that is, an off-chip storage unit.

以上各实施例中,处理器可以为中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请技术方案程序执行的集成电路等。例如,处理器可以是数字信号处理器设备、微处理器设备、模数转换器、数模转换器等。处理器可以根据这些设备各自的功能而在这些设备之间分配终端设备或网络设备的控制和信号处理的功能。此外,处理器可以具有操作一个或多个软件程序的功能,软件程序可以存储在存储器中。处理器的所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In the above embodiments, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more of them used to control the technology of the application Integrated circuits for program execution, etc. For example, the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, etc. The processor can distribute control and signal processing functions of terminal devices or network devices among these devices according to their respective functions. In addition, the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory. The functions of the processor can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.

存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可存储静态信息和指令的其它类型的静态存储设备、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和指令的其它类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备,或者还可以是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质等。The memory can be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium accessed by the computer, etc.

本申请实施例中,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况。其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。In the embodiments of the present application, "and/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. Happening. Among them, A and B can be singular or plural.

本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能。A person of ordinary skill in the art may be aware that, in combination with the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the units can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professional technicians can use different methods for each specific application to achieve the described functions.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例只是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be Integrate into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.

另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机 软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (15)

一种指示资源的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for indicating resources, characterized by comprising: 第二节点获取资源配置信息,所述资源配置信息用于指示所述第二节点的固定资源和动态资源的配置;The second node obtains resource configuration information, where the resource configuration information is used to indicate the configuration of fixed resources and dynamic resources of the second node; 所述第二节点接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二节点的第一指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的上级节点;The second node receives the first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the second node, so The first node is an upper-level node of the second node; 所述第二节点根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上所述第二节点和所述第三节点之间的资源的可用状态,所述第二指示区域包括未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源,所述第二指示信息指示所述未被第一指示信息指示的所述至少一个动态资源的状态为不可用;The second node determines second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the difference between the second node and the third node in the second indication area The available state of the resources between the two, the second indication area includes at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information The status is unavailable; 所述第二节点向所述第三节点发送所述第二指示信息,所述第三节点为所述第二节点的下级节点。The second node sends the second indication information to the third node, and the third node is a subordinate node of the second node. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二节点根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the second node determining second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information comprises: 所述第二指示区域还包括Y个固定资源,所述第二指示信息指示所述Y个固定资源中的Z个的可用状态为可用或者不可用,其中,Y、Z为大于或者等于0的整数,并且Z小于或者等于Y。The second indication area further includes Y fixed resources, and the second indication information indicates whether the availability status of Z of the Y fixed resources is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are greater than or equal to 0 Integer, and Z is less than or equal to Y. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一指示区域上的所述第二节点的MT的部分资源的可用状态,所述第二节点根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the second node in the first indication area, and the second indication area Before the node determines second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, the method further includes: 所述第二节点根据所述MT的部分资源的可用状态,确定所述第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态;The second node determines the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the available state of some resources of the MT; 或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一指示区域上的所述第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态,所述第二节点根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:Alternatively, the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node in the first indication area, and the second node is configured according to the first indication information and the resource configuration Before the information determines the second indication information, the method further includes: 所述第二节点根据所述第一指示信息,确定所述第二节点的DU的动态资源的可用状态。The second node determines the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU of the second node according to the first indication information. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息的配置信息包括以下信息中的至少一种:所述第一指示区域的起始时间,所述第一指示区域的结束时间,所述第一指示区域的持续时间,所述第一指示信息所在的时域资源位置和所述第一指示区域的起始时间之间的间隔,所述动态资源的资源标识,所述资源标识包括符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the configuration information of the first indication information comprises at least one of the following information: the start time of the first indication area, the The end time of the first indication area, the duration of the first indication area, the interval between the time domain resource location where the first indication information is located and the start time of the first indication area, the dynamic resource The resource identifier includes at least one of a symbol number, a slot number, a subframe number, and a system frame number. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the method further comprises: 所述第二节点从所述第一节点接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述第一指示区域上一个或多个第一动态资源的可用状态,所述第三指示信息指示的所述第一动态资源的可用状态与所述第一指示信息指示的所述第一动态资源的可用状态不同,所述第三指 示信息在时域上位于所述第一指示信息之后;The second node receives third indication information from the first node, where the third indication information indicates the available status of one or more first dynamic resources on the first indication area, and the third indication information indicates The available state of the first dynamic resource is different from the available state of the first dynamic resource indicated by the first indication information, and the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; 所述第二节点根据所述第三指示信息指示的所述第一动态资源的可用状态,确定所述第一动态资源的可用状态。The second node determines the available state of the first dynamic resource according to the available state of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示区域上包括第二动态资源,所述第二节点在所述第二动态资源对应的所述第二节点的MT资源上从所述第一节点接收第四指示信息,所述第二动态资源对应的所述第二节点的MT资源通过协议被配置为始终可用,或者所述第二动态资源对应的所述第二节点的MT资源由所述第一节点通过一个不同于所述第四指示信息的指示信息被指示为始终可用。The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the first indication area includes a second dynamic resource, and the second node is in the second dynamic resource corresponding to the second dynamic resource. The node’s MT resource receives the fourth indication information from the first node, the MT resource of the second node corresponding to the second dynamic resource is configured to be always available through the protocol, or the second dynamic resource corresponds to The MT resource of the second node is indicated by the first node as always available through an indication information different from the fourth indication information. 一种指示资源的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for indicating resources, characterized by comprising: 收发单元,用于获取资源配置信息,所述资源配置信息用于指示所述装置的固定资源和动态资源的配置;The transceiver unit is configured to obtain resource configuration information, where the resource configuration information is used to indicate the fixed resource and dynamic resource configuration of the device; 所述收发单元,还用于接收第一节点发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述装置的第一指示区域上的一个或多个所述动态资源的可用状态,所述第一节点为所述装置的上级节点;The transceiving unit is further configured to receive first indication information sent by the first node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of one or more of the dynamic resources on the first indication area of the device, The first node is an upper node of the device; 处理单元,用于根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第二指示区域上所述装置和所述第三节点间的资源可用状态,所述第二指示区域包括未被第一指示信息指示的至少一个动态资源,所述第二指示信息指示所述未被第一指示信息指示的所述至少一个动态资源的状态为不可用;A processing unit, configured to determine second indication information according to the first indication information and the resource configuration information, where the second indication information is used to indicate resources between the device and the third node in the second indication area Available status, the second indication area includes at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information, and the second indication information indicates that the status of the at least one dynamic resource not indicated by the first indication information is not available use; 所述收发单元,还用于向所述第三节点发送所述第二指示信息,所述第三节点为所述装置的下级节点。The transceiving unit is further configured to send the second indication information to the third node, and the third node is a subordinate node of the apparatus. 根据权利要求7所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于:The device according to claim 7, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: 所述第二指示区域还包括Y个固定资源,所述第二指示信息指示所述Y个固定资源中的Z个的可用状态为可用或者不可用,其中,Y、Z为大于或者等于0的整数,并且Z小于或者等于Y。The second indication area further includes Y fixed resources, and the second indication information indicates whether the availability status of Z of the Y fixed resources is available or unavailable, where Y and Z are greater than or equal to 0 Integer, and Z is less than or equal to Y. 根据权利要求7或8所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一指示区域上的所述装置的MT的部分资源的可用状态,所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,还用于:The device according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of some resources of the MT of the device on the first indication area, and the processing unit is based on the Before the first indication information and the resource configuration information determine the second indication information, they are also used to: 所述处理单元根据所述MT的部分资源的可用状态,确定所述装置的DU的动态资源的可用状态;The processing unit determines the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU of the device according to the available state of some resources of the MT; 或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一指示区域上的所述装置的DU的动态资源的可用状态,所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息和所述资源配置信息确定第二指示信息之前,还用于:Alternatively, the first indication information is used to indicate the available status of the dynamic resource of the DU of the device on the first indication area, and the processing unit determines the first indication information and the resource configuration information. Before the second instruction information, it is also used to: 所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息,确定所述装置的DU的动态资源的可用状态。The processing unit determines the available state of the dynamic resource of the DU of the device according to the first indication information. 根据权利要求7-9中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息的配置信息包括以下信息中的至少一种:所述第一指示区域的起始时间,所述第一指示区域的结束时间,所述第一指示区域的持续时间,所述第一指示信息所在的时域资源位置和所述第一指示区域的起始时间之间的间隔,所述动态资源的资源标识,所述资源标识包括符号编号、时隙编号、子帧编号、系统帧号中的至少一种。The device according to any one of claims 7-9, wherein the configuration information of the first indication information comprises at least one of the following information: the start time of the first indication area, the The end time of the first indication area, the duration of the first indication area, the interval between the time domain resource location where the first indication information is located and the start time of the first indication area, the dynamic resource The resource identifier includes at least one of a symbol number, a slot number, a subframe number, and a system frame number. 根据权利要求7-10中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示区域上包 括一个或者多个第一动态资源,The apparatus according to any one of claims 7-10, wherein the first indication area includes one or more first dynamic resources, 所述收发单元,还用于从所述第一节点接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述第一动态资源的可用状态,所述第三指示信息指示的所述第一动态资源的可用状态与所述第一指示信息指示的所述第一动态资源的可用状态不同,所述第三指示信息在时域上位于所述第一指示信息之后;The transceiver unit is further configured to receive third indication information from the first node, the third indication information indicating the available status of the first dynamic resource, and the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information The available state of the resource is different from the available state of the first dynamic resource indicated by the first indication information, and the third indication information is located after the first indication information in the time domain; 所述收发单元,还用于根据所述第三指示信息指示的所述第一动态资源的可用状态,确定所述第一动态资源的可用状态。The transceiver unit is further configured to determine the available state of the first dynamic resource according to the available state of the first dynamic resource indicated by the third indication information. 根据权利要求7-11中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示区域上包括第二动态资源,所述装置在所述第二动态资源对应的所述装置的MT资源上从所述第一节点接收第四指示信息,所述第二动态资源对应的所述装置的MT资源通过协议被配置为始终可用,或者所述第二动态资源对应的所述装置的MT资源由所述第一节点通过一个不同于所述第四指示信息的指示信息被指示为始终可用。The device according to any one of claims 7-11, wherein the first indication area includes a second dynamic resource, and the device has an MT resource of the device corresponding to the second dynamic resource. Receiving fourth indication information from the first node, the MT resource of the device corresponding to the second dynamic resource is configured to be always available through a protocol, or the MT resource of the device corresponding to the second dynamic resource The first node is indicated as always available through an indication information different from the fourth indication information. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1-6 The method described. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于从读取并执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized by comprising a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to execute as claimed in claims 1-6 The method of any one of. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述系统包括第一节点,第二节点以及第三节点,其特征在于,包括:A communication system, characterized in that the system includes a first node, a second node, and a third node, and is characterized in that it includes: 所述第二节点执行如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的指示资源的方法。The second node executes the method for indicating resources according to any one of claims 1-6.
PCT/CN2020/078898 2019-03-15 2020-03-12 Method and device for indicating resources Ceased WO2020187115A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910200130.2A CN111698778B (en) 2019-03-15 2019-03-15 Method and apparatus for indicating resources
CN201910200130.2 2019-03-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020187115A1 true WO2020187115A1 (en) 2020-09-24

Family

ID=72475542

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/078898 Ceased WO2020187115A1 (en) 2019-03-15 2020-03-12 Method and device for indicating resources

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111698778B (en)
WO (1) WO2020187115A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114650548A (en) * 2020-12-18 2022-06-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 Resource allocation method, device, network node and storage medium

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116326064A (en) * 2020-10-23 2023-06-23 华为技术有限公司 A communication method and device
CN115190606A (en) * 2021-04-02 2022-10-14 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method and device
EP4324139A4 (en) * 2021-04-16 2025-01-01 Qualcomm Incorporated INDICATION OF AVAILABLE REFERENCE SIGNAL SLOT BY GROUP COMMON DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104956750A (en) * 2014-01-24 2015-09-30 华为技术有限公司 Resource indication method, apparatus and system
WO2018127221A1 (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-12 电信科学技术研究院 Resource indication method and related device
CN108632779A (en) * 2017-03-17 2018-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Resource allocation methods and device, method for obligating resource and device
CN108934030A (en) * 2018-07-19 2018-12-04 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 A method of avoiding the base station IAB cross jamming
US20190053317A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for providing radio resource control and fronthaul control on a wireless fronthaul link

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2465313A4 (en) * 2009-08-14 2016-10-19 Nokia Technologies Oy Flexible ways to indicate downlink/uplink backhaul subframe configurations in a relay system
KR101650749B1 (en) * 2009-08-18 2016-08-24 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for allocation and indication of control channel in backhaul subframe for relay
EP3876660B1 (en) * 2015-10-02 2023-11-08 Sony Group Corporation Telecommunications apparatuses and methods
CN107889268A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-06 华为技术有限公司 Method, terminal device and the network equipment of descending scheduling resource
WO2018124776A1 (en) * 2016-12-29 2018-07-05 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN108513356B (en) * 2017-02-27 2020-01-07 维沃软件技术有限公司 A resource allocation indication method, base station and terminal
CN107484175B (en) * 2017-08-28 2021-01-19 海能达通信股份有限公司 Data transmission method and base station thereof

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104956750A (en) * 2014-01-24 2015-09-30 华为技术有限公司 Resource indication method, apparatus and system
WO2018127221A1 (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-12 电信科学技术研究院 Resource indication method and related device
CN108632779A (en) * 2017-03-17 2018-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Resource allocation methods and device, method for obligating resource and device
US20190053317A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for providing radio resource control and fronthaul control on a wireless fronthaul link
CN108934030A (en) * 2018-07-19 2018-12-04 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 A method of avoiding the base station IAB cross jamming

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
AT&T: "Summary of 7.2.3.4 Mechanisms for resource multiplexing among backhaul and access links", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 #96 R1-1903582, 1 March 2019 (2019-03-01), XP051690858, DOI: 20200602211209X *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114650548A (en) * 2020-12-18 2022-06-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 Resource allocation method, device, network node and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111698778A (en) 2020-09-22
CN111698778B (en) 2023-05-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7374221B2 (en) Communication methods and devices
US12273863B2 (en) Method and apparatus for resource allocation
US20220394737A1 (en) Resource configuration method and network device
CN114451033B (en) A method and device for dynamically indicating resources
CN112970314A (en) Method and apparatus for allocating dynamic resources of an integrated access and backhaul node in a wireless communication system
US20230061750A1 (en) Multi-transmission time interval (tti) grant scheduling
CN115553008B (en) Spatial Relationship and Path Loss Reference Signals for Multi-TRP Operation
WO2020221055A1 (en) Method for receiving data and sending data, and communication apparatus
CN109842928B (en) Information receiving method and device
CN112514516A (en) Facilitating multi-node listen-before-talk functionality through a centralized controller
WO2020187115A1 (en) Method and device for indicating resources
CN116076137A (en) Method for transmitting uplink channel, user equipment, processing device, storage medium and computer program, method for receiving uplink channel and base station
CN111787630B (en) Service transmission method, device, terminal and base station
CN114451017B (en) A method and device for activating and releasing non-dynamically scheduled transmission
WO2020199766A1 (en) Methods and apparatuses for transmitting and receiving synchronization signal
WO2020192719A1 (en) Beam updating method and communication apparatus
CN111756459B (en) Method and device for sending and receiving synchronous signals
WO2021070309A1 (en) Wireless communication node
CN114520987B (en) IAB node conflict handling method, device, equipment and readable storage medium
CN117812740A (en) A method and device for collaborative transmission data scheduling
JP7564131B2 (en) Wireless communication node
WO2022105904A1 (en) Transmission processing method and apparatus, and communication device
WO2021062892A1 (en) Method and device for dynamic indication of resources
JP7755087B2 (en) Method and device for sidelink communications
CN115701731B (en) Interference processing method, related equipment and readable storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20773296

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20773296

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1